Update to version 4.0. Provide support for
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
40"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
41description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 42
1fa28578
GM
43\f
44* Changes in Emacs 21.1
45
8416e94a
DL
46** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
47symbol, not double-quoted.
48
2a64f8c2 49** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
8416e94a
DL
50version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
51rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to
52lisp/obsolete.
2a64f8c2 53
22adbe54
DL
54+++
55** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
56system for keyboard input.
57
eb1b0c74
GM
58+++
59** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
60to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
61
7495f7ca
EZ
62+++
63** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
64as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
65with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
66example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
67middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
68
1636ca09 69+++
a01cfb77
GM
70** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
71changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
72buffer by default.
73
c607d53d 74** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 75trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
76this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
77
4104194e
GM
78** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
79be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
80
c6f01e00
MB
81** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
82To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
83`auto-compression-mode' command.
84
4c724b32
DL
85** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
86`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
87
b856f39c 88+++
068127d6
GM
89** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
90operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
91
fd06c7da
MB
92** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
93(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
94remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
95may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
96
8ac08dea 97+++
62c273d7
DL
98** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
99is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
100
101+++
102** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
103mode `iswitchb-mode'.
104
8ac08dea 105+++
f393cf90
DL
106** Gnus changes.
107
108The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
109four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
110internationalization and mail-fetching.
111
112*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
113many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
114
115If you used procmail like in
116
117(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
118(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
119(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
120(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
121
327652be 122this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
123
124(setq mail-sources
125 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
126 :suffix ".in")))
127
128More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
129Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
130
131*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
132Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
31446945
KH
133Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
134longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
135
657706fa
DL
136The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
137use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
138installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
f393cf90 139
60dd7e0e 140*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
141parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
142are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
143now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
144
145*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
146called to position point.
147
148*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
149summary buffers and NOV files.
150
151*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
152of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
153
154*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
155subtly different manner.
156
157*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
158and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
159ever-changing layouts.
160
161*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
162
72190b84 163*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
164
165** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1668859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
167more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
168empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
169window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
170on.
171
ba9eeda1
GM
172** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
173set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
174file that is already visited under a different name.
175
42ac0ae5
GM
176** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
177nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
178
179** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
180recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
181signaled.
182
ba9eeda1 183** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
184support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
185use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
186buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
187M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
188new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
189
b941a14b 190+++
ba9eeda1 191** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 192and displays information about that.
b941a14b 193
ba9eeda1 194** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
195file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
196
5e56e175
GM
197** Polish, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
198have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `de-refcard.tex' and
199`fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
d7b38c05 200
657706fa
DL
201** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
202
d7b38c05 203** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
5e56e175
GM
204`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
205`fr-drdref.tex'.
d7b38c05 206
25ad1371
GM
207** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
208expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
209
210This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
211determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
212mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
213interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
214regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
215associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
216
b856f39c 217+++
f0298744
DL
218** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
219displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
220menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
221menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
222
9a8d84ca
DL
223** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
224a version-dependent component.
225
5f368d29
GM
226** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to
227let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward.
228
229On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
230according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
231key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
232option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
233delete backward, and Delete can be used used to delete forward
234
235If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
236a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
237Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
238`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
239the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't
240have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
241
242Programmatically, you can call function
243delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete
244key.
d76c03ea 245
3b4fa1b2
DL
246** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
247using that menu.
248
40e857ea 249** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 250suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 251
beb2eb00 252+++
c08398de
DL
253** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
254buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
255contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
256by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
257insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
258the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
259Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
260
db7a3ede 261+++
3d6cd763
GM
262** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
263coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
264escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
265such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
266recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 267always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 268read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
269(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
270RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 271
0b8a3a6d
DL
272** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
273environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
274
424d8b44 275+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
276** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
277point in a pop-up window.
278
6d35b49f 279+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
280** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
281displays all characters in that character set.
282
283** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
284coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
285
a4067978 286+++
5cb6a58e 287** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 288on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
289defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
290commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 291
424d8b44 292+++
a1b8d58b
GM
293** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
294
6e417ca5
DL
295** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
296been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
297
424d8b44 298+++
5898e075
DL
299** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
300`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
301indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
302indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
303
424d8b44 304+++
abfcc168
GM
305** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
306sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 307(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
308You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
309
424d8b44 310+++
cc181e95
GM
311** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
312on the display using several methods
313
424d8b44 314+++
cc181e95
GM
315- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
316a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
317be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
318
424d8b44 319+++
cc181e95 320- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 321equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 322
da4496b6 323- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
324
325- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
326the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
327
424d8b44 328+++
3b4fa1b2 329** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 330an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 331command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 332does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 333
424d8b44 334+++
176256a1 335** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
336`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
337typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 338
dd0add8e
DL
339** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
340characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
341
bf3ba9ac 342+++
699238d9
GM
343** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
344compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
345this behavior.
346
347The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
348compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
349Emacs dump core.
350
424d8b44 351+++
699238d9 352** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 353
7233c5bd
GM
354*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
355whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
356is useful for debugging X problems.
357
358Example:
359
699238d9 360 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 361
100b3cbb
GM
362*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
363visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
364the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
365and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
366visual class names are
367
368 TrueColor
369 PseudoColor
370 DirectColor
371 StaticColor
372 GrayScale
373 StaticGray
374
375Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
376`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
377meaning.
378
379The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
380supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
381`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
382visual.
383
384Example:
385
699238d9 386 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
387
388*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
389specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
390default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
391resource values are `true' or `on'.
392
393Example:
394
699238d9 395 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 396
0d0c76b8
EZ
397** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
398more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
399now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
400
e921a911 401+++
42088c12 402** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 403display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
404shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
405be customized.
c60ea02e 406
424d8b44 407+++
31047e0d
DL
408** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
409
424d8b44 410+++
b02786f9
GM
411** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
412all frames except the selected one.
413
3261c1d8
DL
414** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
415to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
416
ffe36136 417** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
418the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
419MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
420displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
421
0292b49f 422+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
423** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
424MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 425
559cee90
DL
426** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
427read mail from the menu etc.
428
480b5773 429+++
271b4185
GM
430** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
431a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
432
0daee095
GM
433** Changes in Texinfo mode.
434
a5e350c9 435*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
436macros
437
438 Key binding Macro
439 -------------------------
440 C-c C-c C-s @strong
441 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 442 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 443 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 444 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
445 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
446 M-RET @item
447
448*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 449
559cee90
DL
450** Changes in Outline mode.
451
452There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
453`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
454the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
455
327652be 456** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 457
c0a8c108
EZ
458+++
459*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
460with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
461are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
462Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
463buffers to kill, as before.
464
465Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 466i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
467this way.
468
956777b3
GM
469** Changes to Show Paren mode.
470
471*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
472The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
473use. Default is 1000.
474
f6989277 475+++
404fa7d6
DL
476** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
477groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
478
424d8b44
DL
479+++
480** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
481M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
482M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
483buffers.
8964fec7 484
424d8b44 485+++
39783d73
WP
486** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
487under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
488.emacs file.
489
490The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
491determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
492
d35fce81
GM
493** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
494abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
495`directory-abbrev-alist'.
496
a933dad1
DL
497** Faces and frame parameters.
498
499There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
500Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
501`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
502`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
503sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
504for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
505parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
506
507Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
508`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 509`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
510`default' face and vice versa.
511
d80061fa 512+++
f77a4a8a
GM
513** New face `menu'.
514
515The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
516Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
517attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
518
424d8b44 519+++
a933dad1
DL
520** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
521
522The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
523colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
524correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
525the screen gamma of a frame's display.
526
527PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
528in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
529color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
530
531The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
532`ScreenGamma'.
533
534** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
535
536The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
537Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
538oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
539of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
540the text.
541
542** Emacs has a new face implementation.
543
544The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
545font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
546height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
547These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
548specify a font.
549
550Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
551These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
552under Lisp changes, below.
553
7f90b826 554** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
a933dad1 555
424d8b44
DL
556+++
557** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
558of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
559otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
560
561** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
562truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
563foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
564customizing face `fringe'.
565
8d0f00fd
MB
566** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
567You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
568
569The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
570versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
571and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
572
573** LessTif support.
574
424d8b44
DL
575Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
576You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
577
578** Toolkit scroll bars.
579
580Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
581LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
582configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
583bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
584bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
585Emacs.
586
587When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
588Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
589Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
590Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
591define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
592`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
593
594Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
595a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
596directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
597different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
598system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
599add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
600
601The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
602`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
603This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
604image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
605Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
606
607** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
608
609When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
610widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
611Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
612
424d8b44 613+++
a933dad1
DL
614** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
615
616When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
617whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
618defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
619highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
620displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
621whitespace.
622
6e612d4d 623+++
a933dad1
DL
624** Busy-cursor.
625
626Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
627display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
628
424d8b44 629+++
a933dad1
DL
630** Blinking cursor
631
632M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
633terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
634and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
635the group `cursor'.
636
8ac08dea 637+++
a933dad1
DL
638** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
639
640This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
641generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
642See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
643details.
644
645Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
646have to do anything to activate it.
647
648** Tabs and variable-width text.
649
650Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
651defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
652independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
653Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
654
655** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
656
424d8b44 657+++
a933dad1
DL
658*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
659
660 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
661
79dd1637
RS
662The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
663LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 664
79dd1637
RS
665*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
666LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 667
34d90e29 668+++
a933dad1
DL
669** Hscrolling in C code.
670
cc181e95
GM
671Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
672`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
673customized.
a933dad1 674
03ff8aab
GM
675If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
676scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
677for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
678the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
679to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
680
8ac08dea 681+++
a933dad1
DL
682** Tool bar support.
683
684Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
685of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
686changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
687displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
688if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
689icons will be used.
690
691To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
692for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
693also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 694
424d8b44 695+++
a933dad1
DL
696** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
697
698Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
699mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
700line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
701about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
702in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
703
704Currently, the following actions have been defined:
705
706- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
707buffers.
708
709- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
710M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
711
712- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
713
424d8b44
DL
714- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
715`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
716
717- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
718
719** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
720
721When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 722from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
723non-nil.
724
725** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
726
727Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
728Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
729the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
730italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
731Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
732attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
733on terminals.
a933dad1 734
54a9404d
EZ
735The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
736supported on character terminals.
737
a933dad1
DL
738** Sound support
739
2f516940 740Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 741driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 742supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 743
424d8b44 744+++
a933dad1
DL
745** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
746the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
747forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
748value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
749users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
750even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
751
752The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
753
0e18b431 754+++
a933dad1
DL
755** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
756
757As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
758drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
759`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
760
fdd8bb68 761+++
a933dad1
DL
762** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
763bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
764
765This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
766`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
767variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
768
c5d00c64 769+++
a933dad1
DL
770** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
771
772When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 773value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 774number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 775fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
776
777When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
778value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
779number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 780fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
781
782** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
783notably at the end of lines.
784
785All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
786spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
787
424d8b44 788+++
eee54b0e
DL
789There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
790
a933dad1
DL
791** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
792query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
793after each match to get the replacement text.
794
00782214 795+++
d5483ab1
GM
796** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
797you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 798
424d8b44 799** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
800you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
801lisp-complete-symbol.
802
7af69644 803+++
a933dad1
DL
804** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
805
163ea954 806If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
807longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
808is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
809minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
810
811- User option: max-mini-window-height
812
813Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
814fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 815specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
816
817Default is 0.25.
818
a299a6f0
GM
819- User option: resize-mini-windows
820
821How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 822resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
823grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
824again.
825
826Default is `grow-only'.
827
2f72fd2f
GM
828** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
829
0d43b60d
GM
830** Changes to hideshow.el
831
832Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
833selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
834conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
835
836*** Generalized block selection and traversal
837
838A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
839(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
840which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
841`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
842point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
843(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
844
845If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
846i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
847backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
848the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
849
850*** Isearch support for updating mode line
851
852During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
853blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
854line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
855portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
856is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
857
858To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
859something like this in your .emacs.
860
861 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
862 (lambda ()
863 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
864
327652be
TTN
865*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
866
867Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
868header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
869`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
870moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
871block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
872behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
873useful.
874
875You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
876function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
877of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
878code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
879appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
880
881(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
882 (hs-hide-level 1)
883 (forward-sexp 1))
884(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
885
886The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
887emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
888only for code blocks.
889
890*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
891
892Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
893parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
894display for implementation.
895
896*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
897
898The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
899LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
900which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
901new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
902
903 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
904 hs-show-block C-c C-s
905 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
906 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
907 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
908 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
909 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
910
911These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
912
559cee90
DL
913** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
914
424d8b44 915+++
1b24b888
GM
916*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
917an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
918log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
919
424d8b44 920+++
1b24b888
GM
921**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
922current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
923
924+++
1b24b888
GM
925*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
926in a log file.
eb2aac9d 927
502004be 928+++
1b24b888
GM
929*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
930entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 931
502004be 932+++
1b24b888 933*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
934version number is performed based on regular expressions from
935`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
936Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 937
2c63c979 938*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 939
79c78e77
GM
940** Changes to cmuscheme
941
942*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
943`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
944
3476b54a
GM
945** Changes in Font Lock
946
947*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 948font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 949
2c63c979
SM
950*** multiline patterns are now supported.
951
a5e350c9
SM
952*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
953the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 954
601e0081
SM
955*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
956Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
957
b3b98592
GM
958** Comint (subshell) changes
959
988cded7
MB
960These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
961include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
962
963*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
964to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
965parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
966user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
967this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
968respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
969feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
970`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
971
972*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
973and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
974
988cded7 975*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
976buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
977buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
978
979The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
980M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
981the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
982
988cded7
MB
983*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
984and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
985see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 986
988cded7 987*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
988saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
989argument, it appends to the file.
990
988cded7 991*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
992(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
993compatibility.
994
0e40b809
EL
995*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
996ring (history).
d648cc45 997
fe5d5d8c 998*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6dde6abc
GM
999identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1000strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
fe5d5d8c 1001
e26cec67
GM
1002** Changes to Rmail mode
1003
b97cd2cc 1004*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
1005set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
1006receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1007recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1008`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1009as correspondent.
1010
1011Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1012mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 1013regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 1014
3b55acc9
GM
1015*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1016to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1017Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1018with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1019for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1020
6a1950ec
GM
1021*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1022like `j'.
1023
5bb6f079
RS
1024*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1025specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 1026digest message.
e26cec67 1027
993d8b7d
DL
1028*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1029in which folder to put messages automatically.
1030
400a1ed0
GM
1031** Changes to TeX mode
1032
a5e350c9 1033*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
1034`latex-mode'.
1035
a5e350c9
SM
1036*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1037
1038*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1039
1040*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 1041
a933dad1
DL
1042** Changes to RefTeX mode
1043
1044*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1045 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1046 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1047 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1048 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1049 can be edited from that buffer.
1050
1051*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1052 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1053 `A' to use all marked entries).
1054
1055*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1056 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1057
1058*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1059 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1060 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1061 been cited.
1062
38de9631
GM
1063** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1064The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1065semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1066in column 1 are always made leaves.
1067
a933dad1
DL
1068** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1069has the following new features:
1070
1071*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1072may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1073to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1074time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1075
1076*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1077feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1078file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1079compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1080pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1081defaults to 1.
1082
5d94f558 1083** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1084file names.
1085
424d8b44 1086+++
a933dad1
DL
1087** Tooltips.
1088
1089Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1090mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1091turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1092
1093Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1094variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1095the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1096tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1097
424d8b44 1098+++
a933dad1
DL
1099** Customize changes
1100
1101*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1102`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1103cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1104
1105*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1106Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1107default).
1108
0ae51efb
GM
1109*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1110between custom options. Example:
1111
1112 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1113 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1114 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1115 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1116 :group 'mule
1117 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1118 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1119
1120This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1121current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1122first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1123
a933dad1
DL
1124** New features in evaluation commands
1125
5e03eb84 1126*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1127modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1128print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1129customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1130eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1131
5e03eb84
GM
1132*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1133code when called with a prefix argument.
1134
ead53494
GM
1135** Ispell changes
1136
37d8a691 1137+++
bbe15990
EZ
1138*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1139transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1140spell-checks the current buffer.
1141
37d8a691 1142+++
385ff9e3
GM
1143*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1144added.
1145
1146*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1147correction is made and re-checked.
1148
74ec6045 1149*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1150
1151*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1152cases.
1153
1154*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1155on syntax errors.
1156
1157*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1158end of the buffer.
1159
a933dad1
DL
1160** Dired changes
1161
1162*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1163command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1164is, delete only empty directories.
1165
1166*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1167command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1168copy directories recursively.
1169
f6737cde
GM
1170*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1171in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1172the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1173
2f72fd2f
GM
1174*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1175replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1176directory.
1177
7381ae05
MB
1178*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1179a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1180This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1181will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1182accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1183
e024b101
GM
1184*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1185from ls switches.
1186
60b392a7
MB
1187*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1188of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1189which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1190source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1191
a933dad1
DL
1192** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1193use the -f option when sending mail.
1194
b1c609b1
GM
1195** CC mode changes.
1196
1197Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1198current user setups (although it's believed that these
1199incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1200However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1201back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1202compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1203release.
1204
7972fcfc
GM
1205*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1206This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1207of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1208non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1209want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1210have to bother.
1211
1212Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1213situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1214and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1215If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1216the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1217by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1218
b1c609b1
GM
1219*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1220When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1221variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1222take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1223is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1224settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1225possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1226Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1227
1228By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1229special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1230the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1231of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1232above.
1233
1234Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1235when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1236function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1237call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1238then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1239values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1240only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1241function documentation for more info.
1242
1243The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1244especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1245with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1246intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1247such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1248is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1249configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1250global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1251
1252(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1253
1254**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1255This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1256
1257This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1258variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1259completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1260the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1261empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1262style system.
1263
1264**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1265In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1266c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1267as far as possible.
1268
1269*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1270CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1271surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1272chapter about this in the manual.
1273
1274**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1275The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1276recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1277primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1278adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1279
1280**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1281This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1282c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1283
1284**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1285This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1286
1287It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1288Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1289A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1290inside CC Mode.
1291
1292Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1293causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1294the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1295available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1296cc-mode/).
1297
1298**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1299The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1300specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1301literals.
1302
1303**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1304It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1305prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1306you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1307this function.
1308
1309*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1310It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1311to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1312struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1313Thanks to Eric Eide.
1314
1315*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1316It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1317opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1318
1319**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1320
1321*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1322See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1323better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1324and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1325
1326*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1327previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1328the column specified by comment-column.
1329
1330*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1331In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1332is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1333prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1334contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1335don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1336
1337*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1338instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1339arguments.
1340
1341*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1342
1343*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1344c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1345c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1346variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1347Provan).
1348
1349*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1350
c407c570
GM
1351** Makefile mode changes
1352
1353*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1354
5d94f558 1355*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1356Fontlock mode is active.
1357
87be76f6
GM
1358** Isearch changes
1359
3353ef5a
GM
1360*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1361so that searches can be resumed.
1362
1363*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1364respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1365that started the search.
1366
87be76f6 1367*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1368selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1369
c8a8458a 1370+++
87be76f6
GM
1371*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1372
d35fce81 1373Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1374`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1375search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1376before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1377highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1378`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1379
1380The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1381will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1382Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1383using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1384usual snappy response.
1385
1386If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1387matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1388set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1389isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1390
21bc6203 1391+++
35384f06
GM
1392** Changes in sort.el
1393
1394The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1395as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1396new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1397numeric base.
87be76f6 1398
d7b511c4
GM
1399** Changes to Ange-ftp
1400
424d8b44 1401+++
d7b511c4 1402*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1403names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1404sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1405
d7b511c4
GM
1406*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1407ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1408
9d453139
SS
1409*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1410output ^M at the end of lines.
1411
4b9347b3
GM
1412** Shell script mode changes.
1413
1414Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1415derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1416sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1417
79214ddf
FP
1418** Etags changes.
1419
1420*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1421
aca0be23 1422*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1423possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1424{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1425This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1426a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1427
79214ddf
FP
1428*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1429declarations when given the --declarations option.
1430
1431*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1432"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1433
1434*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1435types.
1436
de370c4c 1437*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1438
1439*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1440
1441*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1442are now tagged.
1443
1444*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1445variables are tagged.
1446
1447*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1448
8dc78b52
FP
1449*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1450for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1451
c8d94f86 1452+++
f6737cde
GM
1453** Changes in etags.el
1454
3f6e4b8b
GM
1455*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1456tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1457is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1458
f6737cde
GM
1459*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1460the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1461
1462If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1463FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1464TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1465obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1466
1467TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1468
1469FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1470List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1471
1472A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1473
1474 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1475 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1476 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1477
1478*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1479of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1480
1481*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1482names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1483
0c68ce6f
GM
1484*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1485If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1486/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
1487"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename,
1488point will go to the beginning of the file.
1489
424d8b44 1490+++
fbc164de
PE
1491** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1492and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1493LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1494
c3eb1f10 1495+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1496** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1497Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14988859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1499GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
15008859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1501releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1502(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1503
424d8b44 1504+++
163ea954 1505** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1506remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1507appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1508
1509** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1510
424d8b44 1511+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1512** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1513
6ab8d72d 1514+++
f6499c03 1515** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1516containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1517expression from that list, are not checked.
1518
5d94f558
SS
1519** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1520When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1521and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1522the buffer, just like for the local files.
1523
dc28878c
GM
1524** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1525
df8a9f78 1526+++
95931eb1
GM
1527** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1528displays local abbrevs, only.
1529
54baed30
GM
1530** VC Changes
1531
1532VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1533easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1534Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1535to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1536changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1537`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1538version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1539each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1540file is registered in that backend.
1541
1542When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1543backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1544directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1545master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1546the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1547As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1548
1549The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1550still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1551RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1552vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1553where it doesn't make sense.)
1554
1555The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1556obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1557`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1558
1559*** General Changes
1560
1561The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1562checks are always done now.
1563
327652be 1564VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1565operations.
1566
c286608e
SM
1567`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1568`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1569`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1570
22933be8
AS
1571The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1572first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1573current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1574the working file (``merge news'').
1575
1576The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1577(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1578downwards.
1579
1580*** Multiple Backends
1581
1582VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1583useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1584repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1585commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1586local RCS archives.
1587
1588To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1589should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1590backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1591`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1592
1593If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1594it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1595Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1596by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1597backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1598VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1599happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1600from the more remote backend.
1601
1602If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1603another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1604any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1605pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1606
1607After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1608changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1609local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1610buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1611
54baed30
GM
1612*** Changes for CVS
1613
1614There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1615default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1616remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1617by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1618regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1619that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1620queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1621
22933be8
AS
1622If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1623repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1624revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1625any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1626backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1627number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1628(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1629of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1630the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1631automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1632since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1633name.)
22933be8 1634
54baed30
GM
1635If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1636repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1637If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1638commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1639current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1640entire directory tree.
1641
1642The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1643"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1644is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1645"watched" by other developers.)
1646
22933be8
AS
1647The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1648(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1649an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1650starting at the given directory.
1651
54baed30
GM
1652*** Lisp Changes in VC
1653
1654VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1655add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1656library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1657then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1658a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1659provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1660of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1661you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1662`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1663
a933dad1
DL
1664** New modes and packages
1665
79b9f6e0
MB
1666*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1667automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1668the default is not applicable.
1669
b95b34e5
GM
1670*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1671rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1672shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1673
1674Features are:
1675
1676- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1677 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1678 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1679 | / \
1680
1681- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1682 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1683 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1684 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1685 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1686 you are drawing.
1687
1688- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1689 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1690
1691- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1692 flood-filling.
1693
1694- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1695 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1696 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1697 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1698
b95b34e5
GM
1699- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1700 also do without the mouse.
1701
1702- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1703 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1704 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1705 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1706 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1707
1708- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1709
1710 lines straight-lines
1711 rectangles squares
1712 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1713 ellipses circles
1714 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1715 spray-can setting size for spraying
1716 vaporize line vaporize lines
1717 erase characters erase rectangles
1718
1719 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1720 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1721 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1722 drawing.
1723
1724 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1725 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1726 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1727 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1728
1729- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1730 can be turned off).
1731
4473cdd9
JW
1732+++
1733*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1734implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1735It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1736functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1737history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1738will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1739the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1740rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1741all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1742
ff332647 1743+++
90cbf47e
GM
1744*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1745intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1746typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1747on certain projects.
1748
894ca69e 1749+++
90cbf47e 1750*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1751regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1752
d96d6bb0 1753 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1754
1755will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1756face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1757typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1758Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1759appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1760current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1761corresponding file is read.
1762
424d8b44 1763+++
d96d6bb0 1764*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1765Emacs is idle.
1766
31fc5d15
GM
1767*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1768parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1769
5cb6a58e
SM
1770*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1771package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1772be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1773`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1774comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1775
424d8b44 1776+++
578979ee
GM
1777*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1778facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1779separate Texinfo file.
1780
424d8b44
DL
1781+++
1782*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1783by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1784provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1785`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1786enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1787
424d8b44 1788+++
6abca616
EZ
1789*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1790without invoking external programs.
1791
1792The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1793and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1794`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1795is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1796Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1797
1798The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1799page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1800
719e2c6e 1801+++
5e5dff44
GM
1802*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1803authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1804
1805The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1806the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1807the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1808Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1809even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1810single step.
1811
1812On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1813matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1814probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1815contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1816
424d8b44 1817+++
f7136ee8
GM
1818*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1819unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1820actually modifying content of a buffer.
1821
bbd9b566
GM
1822*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1823PostScript.
1824
1825Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1826
1827The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1828
1829 ; comment (until end of line)
1830 A non-terminal
1831 "C" terminal
1832 ?C? special
1833 $A default non-terminal
1834 $"C" default terminal
1835 $?C? default special
1836 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1837 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1838 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1839 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1840 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1841 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1842 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1843 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1844 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1845 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1846 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1847 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1848 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1849 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1850 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1851
1852Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1853
99453a38
GM
1854*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1855align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1856determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1857example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1858equal signs of assignments.
1859
424d8b44 1860+++
559cee90
DL
1861*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1862paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1863
424d8b44 1864+++
6448a6b3
GM
1865*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1866list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1867buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1868customize the package.
1869
6344985d
GM
1870*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1871
249652b1
GM
1872*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1873replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1874is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1875and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1876not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1877which answers different needs.
1878
424d8b44 1879+++
3476b54a
GM
1880*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1881suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1882expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1883course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1884reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1885to be enabled.
1886
424d8b44 1887+++
8964fec7
SM
1888*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1889containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1890
424d8b44 1891+++
a933dad1
DL
1892*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1893
424d8b44 1894+++
a933dad1
DL
1895*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1896
1897*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1898
8901d1ac
GM
1899Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1900`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1901disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1902`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1903displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1904and background colors.
1905
a933dad1
DL
1906*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1907Pascal) language.
1908
f6499c03 1909+++
a933dad1
DL
1910*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1911the text at point.
1912
1913*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1914
424d8b44 1915+++
8d54eb69
DL
1916*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1917
a933dad1
DL
1918*** whitespace.el ???
1919
ebcfda83
GM
1920*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1921files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1922(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1923interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1924often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1925uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1926codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1927
1928*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1929
1930Here is an example of columns:
1931
1932horse apple bus
1933dog pineapple car EXTRA
1934porcupine strawberry airplane
1935
1936Doing the following settings:
1937
1938 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1939 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1940 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1941 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1942
1943
1944Selecting the lines above and typing:
1945
1946 M-x delimit-columns-region
1947
1948It results:
1949
1950[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1951[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1952[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1953
1954delim-col has the following options:
1955
1956 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1957 before all columns.
1958
1959 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1960 between each column.
1961
1962 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1963 after all columns.
1964
1965 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1966 each column.
1967
1968delim-col has the following commands:
1969
1970 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1971 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1972
424d8b44 1973+++
f507826c 1974*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1975were operated on recently.
1976
1977M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1978
31fc5d15
GM
1979M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1980recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1981
31fc5d15
GM
1982M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1983filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1984file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1985
31fc5d15
GM
1986- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1987- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1988- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1989
31fc5d15
GM
1990The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1991dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1992
8062f458
DL
1993*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1994text.
1995
424d8b44 1996+++
36e24b82 1997*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1998of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1999specific to Message mode.
2000
424d8b44 2001+++
36e24b82
DL
2002*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2003viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2004with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2005
424d8b44 2006+++
aaa659ef
DL
2007*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2008interface to access directory servers using different directory
2009protocols. It has a separate manual.
2010
eee54b0e
DL
2011*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2012for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2013
424d8b44 2014+++
612839b6
GM
2015*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2016
5d94f558 2017*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 2018minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 2019
399da7e3
DL
2020*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2021with the diary features.
2022
6e417ca5
DL
2023*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2024numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2025
4a27bdfb
GM
2026*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2027Fill mode.
2028
60dd7e0e
DL
2029*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2030Gnus facilities.
2031
dace60cf
JW
2032*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2033facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2034difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2035they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 2036
965bc065
DL
2037+++
2038** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2039paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2040
2041+++
2042** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2043to be visited as images.
2044
a933dad1
DL
2045** Withdrawn packages
2046
2047*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2048functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 2049
3261c1d8
DL
2050*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2051
2052*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
2053
2054\f
01242779
DL
2055* Incompatible Lisp changes
2056
2057There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2058may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
2059
2060** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
2061`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
2062
2063** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2064which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2065may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2066these properties are active.
2067
4dd4cc14 2068** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2069ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2070
2071** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2072buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2073make a difference to some code.
2074
4dd4cc14
DL
2075** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2076operates on the minibuffer.
2077
7c94ccf6
EZ
2078** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2079cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2080different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2081(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2082Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2083character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2084multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2085encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2086reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2087sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2088a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2089the buffer as multibyte characters.
2090
2091Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2092MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2093appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2094
7a39158f
DL
2095** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
2096`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail.
2097
2098** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2099long promised.
2100
2a64f8c2
DL
2101** `scroll-left' and `scroll-right' are only effective when
2102`automatic-hscrolling' is nil.
2103
01242779 2104\f
ce75fd23
GM
2105* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2106(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2107
023045d6
DL
2108+++
2109** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
2110from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
2111
eb1b0c74
GM
2112+++
2113** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2114to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2115
52d89894
GM
2116+++
2117** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2118alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2119
693c4692 2120** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2121
1c14ba45 2122+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2123** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2124deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2125being deleted.
2126
1c14ba45 2127+++
39e776cd
SM
2128** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2129
a18a342d 2130+++
1396138a 2131** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2132If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2133skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2134with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2135C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2136charset.
2137
4fbdfdcf
MB
2138+++
2139** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2140the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2141message.
2142
6a0b0752
MB
2143** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2144expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2145
1c14ba45 2146+++
47e351a3
GM
2147** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2148with the more general `:mask' property.
2149
1c14ba45 2150+++
ba9eeda1
GM
2151** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2152
a2bd77b8
GM
2153** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2154backslash.
2155
424d8b44
DL
2156+++
2157** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2158is running in batch mode. For example,
2159
2160 (message "%s" (read t))
2161
2162will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2163to standard output.
2164
2165+++
2166** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2167`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2168
ead53494
GM
2169** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2170will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2171frame or window.
2172
f6499c03 2173+++
27848c01
GM
2174** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2175were added
2176
2177- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2178
2179Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2180a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2181
2182- Function: remq ELT LIST
2183
2184Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2185comparison is done with `eq'.
2186
1c14ba45 2187+++
27848c01 2188** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2189
b548072f
GM
2190** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2191has been changed.
2192
424d8b44 2193+++
07b14857
KH
2194** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2195without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2196convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2197
1c14ba45 2198+++
9662da0b
GM
2199** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2200or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2201
7fce7efb
DL
2202** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2203function was declared obsolete.
2204
1c14ba45 2205+++
5d94f558 2206** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2207retained as an alias).
2208
f98d3086
SM
2209** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2210It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2211is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2212
87efd256
GM
2213** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2214
39b39373
GM
2215- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2216
2217Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2218omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2219the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2220even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2221minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2222means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2223
67c9a1d2
GM
2224** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2225
2226- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2227
2228Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2229
2230This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2231calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2232argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2233value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2234returned.
2235
2236Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2237if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2238it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2239minibuffer even if it is active.
2240
2241Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2242counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2243too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2244and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2245`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2246entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2247
2248ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2249ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2250ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2251ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2252ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2253If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2254Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2255
ead53494
GM
2256** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2257event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2258argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2259
25fa6deb
GM
2260** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2261call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2262message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2263Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2264
5d94f558 2265** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2266meaning no limit.
2267
5d94f558 2268** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2269coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2270DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2271
9b2999d0
DL
2272+++
2273** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2274list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2275
c286608e
SM
2276** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2277
9b2999d0 2278+++
80c05bd3
DL
2279** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2280buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2281This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2282than replacing the local map.
2283
4bc7a543
DL
2284** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2285after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2286
2287** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2288
f6499c03 2289+++
c286608e
SM
2290** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2291as promised long ago.
f0298744 2292
5d94f558 2293** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2294\f
2295* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2296
2297Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2298--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2299When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2300so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2301
85c75536
MB
2302*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2303buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2304the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2305restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2306
0b8a3a6d
DL
2307*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2308`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2309when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2310multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2311
2312*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2313`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2314contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2315
2316*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2317changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2318[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2319regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2320the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2321extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2322bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2323eight-bit-graphic.
2324
2325** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2326
2327A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2328a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2329character set as previously.
2330
2331*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2332They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2333modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2334
2335CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2336characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2337range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2338case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2339
2340FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2341name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2342
2343*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2344registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2345"fontset-default".
2346
2347*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2348argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2349
2350** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2351composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2352buffers and strings.
2353
2354*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2355character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2356code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2357have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2358composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2359composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2360The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2361also been deleted.
2362
2363*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2364specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2365`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2366
2367*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2368MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2369composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2370may differ between buffer and string text.
2371
2372*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2373COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2374
2375*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2376directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2377Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2378`composition' from STRING.
2379
2380*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2381a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2382
2383*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2384obsolete.
2385
965bc065 2386** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2387`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2388for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2389U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2390
2391** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2392`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2393X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2394
2395+++
2396** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2397are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 23980xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2399
399da7e3 2400+++
f0124b4a
DL
2401** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2402that offset in the file before writing.
2403
f98d3086
SM
2404** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2405compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2406
612839b6
GM
2407** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2408`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2409from which the command was issued.
2410
2411** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2412`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2413`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2414additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2415operate on.
2416
271b4185
GM
2417** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2418to `window-buffer-height'.
2419
2420- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2421
2422Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2423The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2424lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2425
2426Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2427respectively.
2428
2429If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2430COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2431
2432The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2433obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2434on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2435
2436Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2437buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2438possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2439is currently displayed in some window.
2440
3c30cb6e
DL
2441** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2442argument function's results.
2443
62f20204
GM
2444** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2445signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2446
c0510d27 2447** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2448header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2449
2450** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2451ignores differences in case and text representation.
2452
2453** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2454cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2455as follows:
2456
2457 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2458 nil don't display a cursor
2459 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2460 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2461 others display a box cursor.
2462
9a0dd3dc
GM
2463** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2464an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2465defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2466set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2467
d7b511c4 2468** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2469specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2470the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2471text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2472
2473Example:
2474
2475 (string-to-syntax "()")
2476 => (4 . 41)
2477
1fa28578
GM
2478** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2479other than 10.
2480
2481*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2482INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2483
5d94f558 2484 #b1111
1fa28578 2485 => 15
5d94f558 2486 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2487 => -15
2488
2489*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2490
5d94f558 2491 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2492 => 438
2493
2494*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2495
5d94f558 2496 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2497 => 48815
2498
2499*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2500
5d94f558 2501 #2R-111
1fa28578 2502 => -7
5d94f558 2503 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2504 => 267
2505
3d4ff2dd 2506** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2507the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2508and isn't a string.
2509
3d4ff2dd
GM
2510** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2511a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2512value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2513not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2514
16ce590d
DL
2515+++
2516** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2517
73825616 2518** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2519for a regexp in a string.
2520
2521** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2522`mouse-position-function'.
2523
723e779c
GM
2524** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2525that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2526
d1e103b2
GM
2527** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2528Keywords are now always considered constants.
2529
31047e0d
DL
2530+++
2531** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2532returns it.
2533
7a85e4df
GM
2534** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2535returned by function `recent-keys'.
2536
02b14400
RS
2537+++
2538** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2539can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2540Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2541etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2542mode.
404fa7d6 2543
02b14400 2544+++
8964fec7
SM
2545** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2546and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2547
02b14400
RS
2548+++
2549** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2550has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2551function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2552returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2553been performed."
2554
2555When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2556and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2557hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2558then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2559
02b14400 2560+++
81da8b32
GM
2561** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2562In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2563and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2564
02b14400 2565+++
9e207b90
GM
2566** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2567with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2568specified table.
2569
2570 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2571
2572Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2573TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2574saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2575what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2576
02b14400 2577+++
d7f89643 2578** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2579Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2580Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2581corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2582Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2583
02b14400 2584+++
dde9e75a
GM
2585** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2586removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2587
02b14400 2588+++
9da30515
GM
2589** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2590instead of being optional.
2591
02b14400 2592+++
d20679eb
GM
2593** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2594modify read-only text.
2595
02b14400 2596+++
fbc164de
PE
2597** New functions and variables for locales.
2598
2599The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2600decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2601time functions like strftime. The new variables
2602`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2603locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2604
2605The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2606environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2607the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2608environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2609not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2610`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2611`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2612
02b14400 2613+++
863476d1
SM
2614** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2615To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2616modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2617start sequences.
2618
02b14400 2619+++
ef6d912c
GM
2620** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2621because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2622
02b14400 2623+++
a933dad1
DL
2624** New function `propertize'
2625
2626The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2627strings with text properties.
2628
2629- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2630
2631Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2632by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2633PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2634specified value of that property. Example:
2635
2636 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2637
2638+++
2639** push and pop macros.
2640
02b14400
RS
2641Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2642are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2643as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2644
2645(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2646(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2647 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2648
02b14400
RS
2649** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2650
6c7fd5aa
RS
2651Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2652are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2653
2654(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2655 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2656 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2657 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2658
2659(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2660 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2661 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2662 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2663
a933dad1 2664+++
6c083b4c
GM
2665** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2666[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2667class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2668or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2669
2670[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2671[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2672[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2673[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2674[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2675 space, and DEL.
2676[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2677 and DEL.
2678[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2679 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2680 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2681[:alpha:] matches letters.
2682 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2683 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2684[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2685[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2686[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2687[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2688 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2689 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2690[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2691[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2692[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2693
2694+++
2695** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2696
2697The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2698
2699- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2700
2701The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2702are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2703
2704:test TEST
2705
2706TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2707Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2708it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2709
2710:size SIZE
2711
2712SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2713many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2714
2715:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2716
2717REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2718full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2719size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
27201.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2721old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2722
2723:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2724
2725THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2726hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2727(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2728
2729:weakness WEAK
2730
b548072f
GM
2731WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2732`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2733`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2734collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2735outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2736
2737- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2738
2739Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2740
2741- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2742
2743Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2744
2745- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2746
2747Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2748values are shared.
2749
2750- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2751
2752Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2753
2754- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2755
2756Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2757
2758- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2759
2760Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2761
2762- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2763
2764Returns the size of TABLE.
2765
d96d6bb0 2766- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2767
2768Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2769
2770- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2771
2772Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2773
2774- Function: clrhash TABLE
2775
2776Clear TABLE.
2777
2778- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2779
2780Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2781not found.
2782
79214ddf 2783- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2784
2785Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2786another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2787
2788- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2789
2790Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2791
2792- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2793
2794Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2795arguments KEY and VALUE.
2796
2797- Function: sxhash OBJ
2798
2799Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2800
2801- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2802
2803Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2804a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2805comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2806and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2807of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2808
2809TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2810
2811HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2812code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2813integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2814
2815Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2816be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2817
2818 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2819 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2820
2821 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2822 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2823
79214ddf 2824 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2825 'case-fold-string-hash))
2826
2827 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2828
2829+++
2830** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2831
2832It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2833circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2834a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2835
2836+++
2837** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2838
2839If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2840#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2841
a933dad1
DL
2842+++
2843** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2844t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2845specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2846is too short to reach that column.
2847
2848+++
2849** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2850now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2851after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2852two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2853
2854If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2855perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2856and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2857
2858+++
2859** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2860to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2861
2862+++
2863** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2864calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2865
2866+++
2867** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2868directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2869small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2870small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2871temporary-file-directory instead.
2872
2873+++
2874** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2875the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2876`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2877hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2878
2879+++
2880** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2881elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2882
2883+++
2884** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2885
2886make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2887creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2888ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2889
2890+++
2891** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2892
2893The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2894on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2895is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2896never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2897ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2898overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2899
2900If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2901that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2902to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2903The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2904
2905+++
2906** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2907
2908Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2909If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2910ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2911result string.
2912
2913Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2914string where arguments appear in the result string.
2915
2916Example:
2917
2918 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2919 (s2 "world"))
2920 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2921 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2922 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2923
2924results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2925
2926+++
2927** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2928
2929Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2930The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2931argument in it.
2932
2933 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2934 (arg "world"))
2935 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2936 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2937 (message msg arg))
2938
2939+++
2940** Sound support
2941
2942Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2943(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2944
2945Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2946(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2947to enable sound support.
2948
2949Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2950list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2951when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2952functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2953sound to play, before playing the sound.
2954
2955The following sound properties are supported:
2956
2957- `:file FILE'
2958
2959FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2960searched relative to `data-directory'.
2961
6fb40beb
GM
2962- `:data DATA'
2963
2964DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2965may be present, but not both.
2966
a933dad1
DL
2967- `:volume VOLUME'
2968
2969VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
29700..1. This property is optional.
2971
01242779
DL
2972- `:device DEVICE'
2973
2974DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2975sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2976
a933dad1
DL
2977Other properties are ignored.
2978
01242779
DL
2979An alternative interface is called as
2980(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2981
a933dad1 2982** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 2983
9b2999d0 2984+++
356673d4
DL
2985** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2986a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2987
2988** Changes to garbage collection
2989
2990*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2991of live and free strings.
2992
2993*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2994strings that have been consed so far.
2995
a933dad1 2996\f
04545643
GM
2997* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2998Lisp Manual
2999
f7eb32aa 3000+++
a299a6f0
GM
3001** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
3002mini-windows.
3003
9b2999d0 3004+++
26fcde61
MB
3005** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3006argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3007returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
ea4c1b7c 3008
a299a6f0 3009** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 3010
9a8d84ca
DL
3011+++
3012** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 3013
9b2999d0 3014+++
2c69ced2
GM
3015** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3016image.
3017
3018- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3019
3020Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3021
3022SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3023measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3024character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3025font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3026FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3027
9b2999d0 3028+++
ebb8f116
GM
3029** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3030has a mask bitmap.
3031
3032- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3033
3034Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3035FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3036or omitted means use the selected frame.
3037
f6499c03 3038+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
3039** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3040satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3041
3042+++
3043** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3044optional.
3045
f6499c03
DL
3046+++
3047** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3048below).
04545643
GM
3049
3050\f
a933dad1
DL
3051* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3052
3053Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3054--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3055When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3056so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3057
f6d3257b
GM
3058** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3059to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3060
3061Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3062text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3063is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3064your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3065laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3066just display it black instead.
3067
3068This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3069a line like
3070
3071 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3072
3073in your `.emacs'.
3074
a933dad1
DL
3075** New face implementation.
3076
3077Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3078font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3079
3080+++
3081*** New faces.
3082
3083Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3084
3085 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3086
a933dad1
DL
3087 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3088 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3089
a933dad1 3090 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3091
a933dad1 3092 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3093
a933dad1 3094 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3095
a933dad1 3096 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3097
a933dad1
DL
3098 7. Background color.
3099
3100 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3101
3102 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3103
3104 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3105
3106 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3107
3108 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3109 color.
3110
3111 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3112 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3113
3114Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3115same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3116frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3117faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3118with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3119attributes mentioned above.
3120
3121There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3122definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3123created frames.
79214ddf 3124
a933dad1
DL
3125A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3126have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3127`fully-specified'.
3128
3129+++
3130*** Face merging.
3131
3132The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3133combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3134aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3135properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3136that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3137results in a fully-specified face.
3138
3139+++
3140*** Face realization.
3141
3142After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3143merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3144realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3145available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3146face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3147cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3148
3149Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3150character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3151for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3152charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3153
3154Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3155specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3156being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3157the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3158statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3159
3160In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3161`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
31620x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3163the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3164initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3165Emacs.
3166
3167Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3168`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3169registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3170with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3171
a7c13351 3172+++
a933dad1
DL
3173**** Clearing face caches.
3174
3175The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3176on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3177unused fonts.
3178
3179+++
3180*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3181
a933dad1
DL
3182Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3183given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3184for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3185
3186If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3187pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3188family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3189property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3190an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3191
3192Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3193against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3194match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3195
3196Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3197
3198The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3199attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3200face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3201names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3202that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3203width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3204to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3205
52d89894
GM
3206Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3207alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
af4bb4c8
KH
3208doesn't exist.
3209
3210Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3211all alternative font registry names to try for a face speciying a
3212registry.
3213
3214Please note that the iterpretations of the above two variables are
3215slightly different.
3216
3217Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3218
a933dad1
DL
3219
3220+++
3221**** Scalable fonts
3222
3223Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3224since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3225servers.
3226
3227To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3228`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3229scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3230Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3231scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3232that list. Example:
3233
3234 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3235
3236allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3237
3238+++
3239*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3240
3241- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3242
3243Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3244is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3245string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3246
3247If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3248the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3249FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3250POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3251SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3252These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3253if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3254REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3255the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3256of the face font sort order.
3257
79214ddf 3258- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3259
3260Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3261omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3262(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3263non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3264
3265- Variable: font-list-limit
3266
3267Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3268won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3269matching font. The default is currently 100.
3270
3271+++
3272*** Setting face attributes.
3273
3274For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3275with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3276implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3277`face-attribute'.
3278
3279Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3280symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3281
3282The following attributes are recognized:
3283
3284`:family'
3285
3286VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3287or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3288and `?' are allowed.
3289
3290`:width'
3291
3292VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3293It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3294`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3295`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3296
3297`:height'
3298
787345ff
MB
3299VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3300in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3301scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3302height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3303
3304`:weight'
3305
3306VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3307symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3308`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3309
3310`:slant'
3311
3312VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3313symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3314`reverse-oblique'.
3315
3316`:foreground', `:background'
3317
3318VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3319
3320`:underline'
3321
3322VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3323VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3324a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3325don't underline.
3326
3327`:overline'
3328
3329VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3330VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3331string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3332overline.
3333
3334`:strike-through'
3335
3336VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3337striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3338face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3339is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3340
3341`:box'
3342
3343VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3344around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3345VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3346of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3347and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3348VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3349:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3350the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3351specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3352defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3353the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3354color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3355should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3356like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3357that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3358the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3359box.
3360
3361`:inverse-video'
3362
3363VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3364inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3365
3366`:stipple'
3367
3368If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3369The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3370searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3371HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3372is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3373explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3374
3375For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3376and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3377
3378`:font'
3379
3380Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3381XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3382is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3383versions of Emacs.
3384
3385For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3386be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3387must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3388
3389Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3390`defface'.
3391
787345ff
MB
3392`:inherit'
3393
3394VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3395of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3396like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3397
a933dad1
DL
3398*** Face attributes and X resources
3399
3400The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3401from X resources:
3402
3403 Face attribute X resource class
3404-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3405 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3406 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3407 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3408 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3409 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3410 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3411 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3412 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3413 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3414 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3415 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3416 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3417 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3418 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3419 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3420 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3421 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3422 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3423 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3424
3425+++
3426*** Text property `face'.
3427
3428The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3429specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3430specification can be
3431
34321. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3433
34342. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3435 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3436 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3437 for face attribute names.
3438
34393. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3440 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3441 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3442
3443+++
3444** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3445
acf3ecb7
EZ
3446The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3447on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3448the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3449default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3450`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3451used to clear the mapping table.
3452
acf3ecb7
EZ
3453** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3454
3455The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3456and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3457type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3458color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3459display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3460old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3461`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3462compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3463should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3464modify their color-related behavior.
3465
3466The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3467any frame type.
3468
8a5719f0
EZ
3469** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3470
3471The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3472`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3473`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3474`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3475`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3476`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3477display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3478the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3479platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3480
a933dad1
DL
3481+++
3482** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3483
463cac2d 3484This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3485To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3486the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3487`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3488
3489The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3490end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3491Otherwise, it returns zero.
3492
463cac2d
GM
3493** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3494
3495There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3496buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3497property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3498
9a9dfda8 3499Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3500forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3501to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3502not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3503commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3504boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3505`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3506functions.
463cac2d
GM
3507
3508Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3509a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3510editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3511
9a9dfda8
GM
3512The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3513
59927f88 3514- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3515
3516Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3517
9a9dfda8
GM
3518A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3519If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3520constrained position if that is is different.
3521
3522If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3523positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3524ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3525constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3526as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3527is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3528fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3529the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3530also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3531
3532If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3533NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3534unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3535C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3536only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3537
59927f88
MB
3538If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3539a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3540
3541Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3542
3543- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3544
59927f88 3545Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3546A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3547If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3548
3549- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3550
3551Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3552A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3553If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3554If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3555field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3556
3557- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3558
3559Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3560A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3561If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3562If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3563then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3564
3565- Function: field-string &optional POS
3566
3567Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3568A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3569If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3570
3571- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3572
3573Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3574A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3575If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3576
a933dad1
DL
3577+++
3578** Image support.
3579
3580Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3581strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3582(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3583replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3584
3585If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3586`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3587AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3588window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3589area.
3590
3591IMAGE is an image specification.
3592
3593*** Image specifications
3594
3595Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3596is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3597specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3598symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3599described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3600
3601The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3602
3603`:ascent ASCENT'
3604
576da55d
GM
3605ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3606If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3607to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3608
3609If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3610image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3611
5d94f558 3612If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3613centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3614of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3615overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3616
3617`:margin MARGIN'
3618
79214ddf 3619MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3620margin around the image. Default is 0.
3621
3622`:relief RELIEF'
3623
3624RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3625around an image.
3626
3627`:algorithm ALGO'
3628
47e351a3
GM
3629Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3630
3631ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3632edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3633
3634ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3635apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3636nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3637position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3638around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3639neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3640transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3641x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3642below.
3643
3644 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3645 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3646 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3647
3648The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3649resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3650multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3651of the factors' absolute values.
3652
327652be 3653Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3654
47e351a3
GM
3655 (1 0 0
3656 0 0 0
3657 9 9 -1)
3658
3659Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3660
3661 ( 2 -1 0
3662 -1 0 1
3663 0 1 -2)
3664
ba9eeda1
GM
3665ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3666``disabled''.
3667
47e351a3
GM
3668`:mask MASK'
3669
3670If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3671the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3672image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3673background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3674image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3675the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3676GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3677image.
a933dad1 3678
47e351a3
GM
3679If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3680in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3681`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3682
3683`:file FILE'
3684
3685Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3686search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3687building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3688may be present in the image specification.
3689
518df5c4
GM
3690`:data DATA'
3691
3692Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3693supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3694present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3695support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3696
a933dad1
DL
3697*** Supported image types
3698
b246b1f6 3699**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3700
3701XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3702properties supported are
3703
3704`:foreground FG'
3705
3706FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3707is the frame's foreground.
3708
46c5af7f 3709`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3710
3711BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3712the frame's background color.
3713
3714XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3715case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3716instead of a `:file' property.
3717
3718`:width WIDTH'
3719
3720WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3721
3722`:height HEIGHT'
3723
3724HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3725
3726`:data DATA'
3727
3728DATA must be either
3729
3730 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3731 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3732
3733 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3734
3735 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3736 bitmap.
3737
c76e04a8
GM
3738 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3739 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3740 in the file.
3741
a933dad1
DL
3742**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3743
3744XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3745`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3746found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3747`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3748
3749Additional image properties supported are:
3750
3751`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3752
3753SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3754name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3755name.
3756
3757XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3758add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3759
a933dad1
DL
3760The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3761to display compressed images.
3762
3763**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3764
3765PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3766mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3767mono images are
3768
3769`:foreground FG'
3770
3771FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3772is the frame's foreground.
3773
3774`:background FG'
3775
3776BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3777the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3778
3779**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3780
3781Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3782package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3783are:
3784
a933dad1
DL
3785**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3786
3787Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3788package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3789properties defined.
3790
3791**** GIF, image type `gif'
3792
3793Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3794`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3795
3796Additional image properties supported are:
3797
3798`:index INDEX'
3799
3800INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3801multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3802
3803This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3804For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3805at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3806every 0.1 seconds.
3807
3808(defun show-anim (file max)
3809 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3810 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3811
3812(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3813 (when (= idx max)
3814 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3815 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3816 (save-excursion
3817 (set-buffer buffer)
3818 (goto-char (point-min))
3819 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3820 (insert-image img "x"))
3821 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3822
3823**** PNG, image type `png'
3824
3825Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3826package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3827properties defined.
3828
3829**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3830
3831Additional image properties supported are:
3832
3833`:pt-width WIDTH'
3834
3835WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3836integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3837
3838`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3839
3840HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3841must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3842
3843`:bounding-box BOX'
3844
3845BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3846the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3847files. This is an required property.
3848
3849Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3850lisp/gs.el.
3851
3852*** Lisp interface.
3853
79214ddf
FP
3854The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3855which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3856
3857Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3858they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3859The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3860manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3861images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3862
3863*** Simplified image API, image.el
3864
3865The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3866creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3867can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3868define an image based on available image types. The functions
3869`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3870buffer.
3871
3872+++
3873** Display margins.
3874
3875Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3876and images.
3877
3878To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3879`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3880`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3881obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3882`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3883the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3884of the display margins.
3885
3886You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3887containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3888one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3889string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3890in this file).
3891
3892+++
3893** Help display
3894
3895Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3896moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3897`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3898that have a `help-echo' property.
3899
9662da0b 3900If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3901is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3902the window in which the help was found.
3903
3904If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3905`help-echo' text property was found.
3906
3907If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3908POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3909
3910If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3911the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3912mouse.
d5aa31d8 3913
9662da0b
GM
3914If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3915string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3916
3917For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3918determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3919property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3920For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3921used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3922
3923The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3924the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3925causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3926
3927+++
3928** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3929
3930The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3931This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3932
3933The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3934scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3935The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3936scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3937used.
3938
79214ddf
FP
3939 (global-set-key [A-down]
3940 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3941 (interactive)
79214ddf 3942 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3943 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3944 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3945 #'(lambda ()
3946 (interactive)
79214ddf 3947 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3948 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3949
3950+++
3951** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3952
3953Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3954when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3955variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3956is called with one argument, POS.
3957
3958At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3959characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3960as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3961property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3962`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3963
3964+++
3965** Tool bar support.
3966
3967Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3968parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3969controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3970suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3971`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3972automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3973
3974*** Tool bar item definitions
3975
3976Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3977`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3978where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3979
a933dad1
DL
3980CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3981evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3982the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3983property (see below).
79214ddf 3984
a933dad1
DL
3985BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3986binding are currently ignored.
3987
3988The following properties are recognized:
3989
3990`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3991
a933dad1
DL
3992FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3993or disabled.
79214ddf 3994
a933dad1 3995`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3996
a933dad1 3997FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3998
a933dad1
DL
3999`:filter FUNCTION'
4000
4001FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
4002FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
4003used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 4004
a933dad1
DL
4005`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4006
4007TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4008and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 4009
a933dad1
DL
4010`:image IMAGES'
4011
4012IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4013image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4014meaning of each of the four elements:
4015
4016 Index Use when item is
4017 ----------------------------------------
4018 0 enabled and selected
4019 1 enabled and deselected
4020 2 disabled and selected
4021 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 4022
4ba7246d
GM
4023If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4024algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4025
a933dad1 4026`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 4027
a933dad1
DL
4028Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4029is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4030
dab96841 4031The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
4032toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4033to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4034menu bar.
dab96841 4035
8628686a
DL
4036The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4037dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4038buffer-locally to override the global map.
4039
a933dad1
DL
4040*** Tool-bar-related variables.
4041
4042If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4043resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4044than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4045
79214ddf 4046If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
4047raised when the mouse moves over them.
4048
4049You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4050`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
4051pixels. Default is 1.
4052
4053You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4054`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4055
4056*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4057
4058You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 4059a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
4060
4061 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4062 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4063 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4064
4065is the original tool bar item definition, then
4066
4067 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4068
4069makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4070item.
4071
4072** Mode line changes.
4073
4074+++
4075*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4076
4077The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4078that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4079a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4080
40811. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4082a `local-map' text property.
4083
40842. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4085that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4086
40873. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4088is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4089`local-map' property.
4090
4091The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4092properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4093example.
4094
54522c9f
GM
4095*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4096evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4097
a933dad1
DL
4098+++
4099*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4100variable mode-line-format to nil.
4101
4102+++
4103*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4104
4105This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4106`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4107completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4108`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4109line.
4110
4111The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4112`header-line'.
4113
4114The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4115position in the header-line.
4116
4117+++
4118** Text property `display'
4119
623a0aae
GM
4120The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4121replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4122also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4123the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4124below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4125
623a0aae
GM
4126*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4127
4128To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4129text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4130
4131If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4132marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4133the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4134is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4135simpler form STRING as property value.
4136
a933dad1
DL
4137*** Variable width and height spaces
4138
4139To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4140specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4141`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4142area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4143marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4144displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4145simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4146
4147The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4148PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4149properties described below.
4150
4151The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4152characters having the `display' property.
4153
4154- :width WIDTH
4155
4156Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4157character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4158
4159- :relative-width FACTOR
4160
4161Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4162first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4163same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4164width of that character by FACTOR.
4165
4166- :align-to HPOS
4167
4168Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4169value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4170
4171Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4172
4173- :height HEIGHT
4174
4175Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4176normal line height.
4177
4178- :relative-height FACTOR
4179
4180The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4181of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4182
4183- :ascent ASCENT
4184
4185Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4186used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4187baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4188equal to 100.
4189
4190You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4191
4192*** Images
4193
4194A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4195. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4196in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4197their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4198the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4199`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4200area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4201the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4202as display specification.
4203
4204*** Other display properties
4205
c9e73000 4206- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4207
4208Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4209should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4210integer or float.
4211
c9e73000 4212- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4213
4214Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4215
4216If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4217means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4218the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4219``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4220a font is available counts as a step.
4221
4222If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4223as tall as the frame's default font.
4224
4225If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4226height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4227
4228Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4229`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4230
c9e73000 4231- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4232
4233FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4234font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4235raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4236amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4237`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4238
4239*** Conditional display properties
4240
4241All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4242has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4243applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4244During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4245the text having the `display' property.
4246
4247The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4248`(:when t SPEC)'.
4249
4250+++
4251** New menu separator types.
4252
4253Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4254item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4255treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4256to specify other menu separator types.
4257
4258- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4259
4260No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4261separator occurs.
4262
4263- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4264
4265A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4266
4267- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4268
4269A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4270
4271- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4272
4273A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4274
4275- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4276
4277A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4278
4279- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4280
4281A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4282displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4283
4284- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4285
4286A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4287
4288- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4289
4290A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4291
4292- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4293
4294A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4295
4296- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4297
4298Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4299
4300- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4301
4302Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4303
4304- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4305
4306Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4307
4308- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4309
4310Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4311
4312Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4313the corresponding single-line separators.
4314
4315+++
4316** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4317
4318The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4319`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4320Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4321that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4322default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4323default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4324default foreground is black.
4325
4326The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4327(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4328`ScrollBarBackground').
4329
4330Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4331settings for scroll bar colors.
4332
4333+++
4334** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4335display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4336
4337---
4338** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4339starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4340on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4341line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4342the original window start.
4343
4344---
4345** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4346`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4347now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4348
4349+++
4350** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4351
4352A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4353`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4354windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4355other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4356
4357The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4358fixed-width and fixed-height.
4359
4360 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4361
4362A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4363fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4364window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4365change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4366temporarily to nil, for example
4367
4368 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4369 (enlarge-window 10))
4370
79214ddf 4371Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4372or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4373
4374** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4375terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4376to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4377overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4378horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4379support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4380
3787e12e 4381
79dfd2cd 4382\f
3787e12e
GM
4383* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4384
4385** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4386input.
4387
4388** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4389
4390** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4391
4392** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4393only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4394exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4395(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4396(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4397
4398** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4399been added.
4400
79dfd2cd 4401\f
3787e12e
GM
4402* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4403
4404** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4405
79dfd2cd 4406\f
3787e12e
GM
4407* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4408
4409** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4410M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4411\f
4412* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4413
4414** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4415
4416You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4417Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4418`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4419
4420If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4421is the one that is used.
4422
4423** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4424the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4425Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4426separate from the command's regular output.
4427Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4428says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4429In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4430the buffer name.
4431
4432When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4433output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4434it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4435cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4436
4437** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4438the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4439is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4440created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4441
4442** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4443example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4444match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4445quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4446
4447** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4448now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4449if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4450they never ignore case.
4451
4452** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4453under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4454applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4455of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4456just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4457convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4458part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4459
4460If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4461the same format that was used in the file before.
4462
4463You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4464`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4465
4466** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4467renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4468This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4469
4470** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4471The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4472buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4473your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4474is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4475end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4476Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4477
4478The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4479eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4480control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4481format. You can now customize these variables.
4482
4483** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4484filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4485filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4486enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4487
4488** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4489in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4490windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4491
4492** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4493dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4494doesn't have any effect.
4495
4496** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4497not one per buffer.
4498
4499** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4500use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4501 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4502
4503** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4504To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4505`auto-show-mode' command.
4506
4507** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4508avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4509versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4510choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4511occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4512
4513** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4514cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4515
4516** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4517character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4518feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4519
4520** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4521the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4522interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4523and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4524
4525** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4526
4527The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4528that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4529one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4530codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4531set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4532
4533Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4534from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4535
4536IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4537equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4538a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4539`?' on other systems.
4540
4541IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4542feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4543Unix.
4544
4545Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4546current codepage when it starts.
4547
4548** Mail changes
4549
4550*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4551`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4552appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4553non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4554MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4555headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4556latin-1:
4557
4558 MIME-version: 1.0
4559 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4560 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4561
4562*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4563default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4564default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4565sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4566buffer-file-coding-system.
4567
4568You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4569sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4570mail.
4571
4572*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4573if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4574Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4575list of possible coding systems.
4576
4577** CC Mode changes
4578
4579*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4580modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4581longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4582docstring for details.
4583
4584*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4585symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4586found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4587prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4588lineup functions use this feature currently.
4589
4590*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4591"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4592
4593*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4594"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4595
4596*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4597from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4598symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4599c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4600anonymous classes.
4601
4602*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4603syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4604
4605*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4606inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4607support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4608function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4609
4610*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4611(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4612brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4613c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4614(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4615
4616*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4617
4618*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4619
4620*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4621for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4622
4623*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4624
4625*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4626associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4627This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4628circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4629class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4630
4631** Gnus changes.
4632
4633*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4634added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4635Gnus manual for the full story.
4636
4637*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4638before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4639group, which is created automatically.
4640
4641*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4642values.
4643
4644*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4645
4646*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4647outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4648
4649*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4650`C-u C-c C-c'.
4651
4652*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4653
4654*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4655re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4656
4657*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4658
4659*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4660Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4661
4662*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4663`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4664
4665*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4666control over simplification.
4667
4668*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4669
4670*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4671limit.
4672
4673*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4674
4675*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4676
4677*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4678If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4679rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4680
4681*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4682`a' forces normal posting method.
4683
4684*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4685-- `W d'.
4686
4687*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4688to a non-nil value.
4689
4690*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4691where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4692
4693*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4694has been added.
4695
4696*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4697
4698*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4699
4700*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4701`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4702
4703*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4704`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4705
4706*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4707
4708*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4709been added.
4710
4711*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4712`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4713
4714*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4715updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4716
4717*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4718
4719*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4720
4721*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4722
4723** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4724
4725*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4726options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4727nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4728
4729*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4730TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4731of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4732TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4733can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4734
4735*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4736All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4737but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4738the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4739
4740*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4741the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4742buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4743mismatch.
4744
4745** Changes to RefTeX mode
4746
4747*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4748file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4749
4750*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4751lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4752characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4753removed from the label.
4754
4755*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4756a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4757
4758*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4759customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4760
4761*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4762`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4763expressions.
4764
4765*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4766
4767** New/deleted modes and packages
4768
4769*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4770SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4771
4772*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4773editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4774SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4775
4776*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4777changes with a special face.
4778
4779*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4780this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4781Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4782\f
4783* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4784
4785** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4786This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4787conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4788and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4789check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4790
4791The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4792Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4793distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4794
4795** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4796MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4797controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4798directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4799Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4800on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4801string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4802program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4803printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4804
4805** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4806output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4807available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4808input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4809temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4810program.
4811
4812An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4813and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4814programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4815automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4816as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4817ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4818
4819** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4820a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4821MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4822was not documented clearly before.
4823
4824** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4825This includes Tetris and Snake.
4826\f
4827* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4828
4829** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4830return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4831They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4832meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4833
4834** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4835WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4836and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4837
4838** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4839
4840*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4841It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4842
4843*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4844the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4845integers.
4846
4847** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4848files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4849arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4850file names and attributes are returned.
4851
4852** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4853sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4854accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4855It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4856returns the result.
4857
4858** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4859to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4860
4861** New functions for base64 conversion:
4862
4863The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4864into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4865performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4866optionally.
4867
4868Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4869job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4870
4871**
4872The new function process-running-child-p
4873will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4874terminal to its own child process.
4875
4876** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4877when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4878to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4879itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4880
4881** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4882be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4883
4884** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4885:included is an alias for :visible.
4886
4887easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4888easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4889to move or copy menu entries.
4890
4891** Multibyte editing changes
4892
4893*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4894an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4895make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4896work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4897char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4898 (setq char (sref str idx)
4899 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4900The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4901
4902If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4903(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4904 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4905
4906*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4907region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4908deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4909
4910 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4911
4912This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4913across the boundary.
4914
4915*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4916`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4917 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4918 contains 8-bit characters.
4919 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4920 contains invalid characters.
4921
4922*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4923text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4924preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4925text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4926way.
4927
4928*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4929If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4930end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4931prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4932
4933*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4934compose Thai characters in a string.
4935
4936** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4937argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4938for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4939menus should always use the third argument.
4940
4941** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4942read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4943arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4944input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4945
4946** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4947of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4948programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4949inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4950
4951** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4952the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4953returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4954echo area contents.
4955
4956 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4957
4958** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4959NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4960requested feature cannot be loaded.
4961
4962** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4963foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4964means to clear out that attribute.
4965
4966** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4967gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4968
4969** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4970read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4971unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4972end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4973
4974** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4975the gap of the current buffer.
4976
4977** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4978to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4979current buffer.
4980
4981** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4982facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4983These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4984it back in after any modifications have been made.
4985\f
4986* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4987
4988** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4989the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4990/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4991directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4992subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4993
4994Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4995names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4996Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4997which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4998these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4999
5000Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
5001starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
5002time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
5003
5004This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5005Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5006to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5007subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5008`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5009results.
5010
5011** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5012GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5013that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5014fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
5015\f
5016* Changes in Emacs 20.3
5017
5018** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5019including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5020it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5021perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5022
5023** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5024specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5025region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5026further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5027command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5028within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5029are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5030region.
5031
5032In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5033selective undo.
5034
5035** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5036unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5037buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5038effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5039Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5040
5041The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5042though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5043-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5044load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5045
5046** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5047no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5048enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5049something that most users not do.
5050
5051** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5052operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5053The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5054applications.
5055
5056C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5057pasting operations.
5058
5059** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5060setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5061like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5062printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5063`ps-printer-name'.
5064
5065** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5066minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5067any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5068except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5069incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5070hits a new word.
5071
5072Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5073Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5074to be confused by TeX commands.
5075
5076You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5077correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5078clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5079of various alternative replacements and actions.
5080
5081Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5082the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5083corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5084alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5085flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5086
5087Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5088flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5089
5090** Changes in input method usage.
5091
5092Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5093the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5094respectively.
5095
5096You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5097
5098If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5099of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5100
5101The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5102that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5103
5104 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5105
5106 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5107
5108 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5109 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5110
5111 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5112 given in the following case:
5113 o When you are using a complex input method.
5114 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5115
5116If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5117input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5118and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5119setting it to t is helpful.
5120
5121The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5122
5123In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5124keys:
5125 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5126 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5127 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5128These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5129environment.
5130
5131** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5132names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5133minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5134get
5135
5136 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5137
5138which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5139
5140Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5141Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5142
5143** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5144at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5145its owner and group.
5146
5147** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5148Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5149
5150** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5151contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5152
5153** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5154which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5155in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5156by the left edge of the rectangle.
5157
5158** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5159increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5160C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5161for writing keyboard macros.
5162
5163** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5164files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5165frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5166the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5167additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5168info.
5169
5170** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5171
5172** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5173query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5174contents only.
5175
5176** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5177confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5178the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5179says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5180
5181** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5182non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5183literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5184
5185** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5186now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5187Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5188inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5189
5190** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5191failure if the command produces no output.
5192
5193** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5194manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5195the mouse.
5196
5197** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5198mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5199function and variable names.
5200
5201** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5202reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5203file-coding-system-alist.
5204
5205** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5206t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5207converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5208the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5209according to the current fontset.
5210
5211** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5212
5213The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5214that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5215nonascii-insert-offset.
5216
5217For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5218enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5219nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5220characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5221
5222** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5223an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5224
5225** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5226letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5227
5228** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5229are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5230command keys.
5231
5232** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5233user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5234
5235Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5236user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5237all variables that have documentation.
5238
5239** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5240shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5241that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5242minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5243it should show; the default is 20.
5244
5245Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5246the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5247of your input.
5248
5249** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5250all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5251recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5252argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5253the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5254Newly added options are included as well.
5255
5256If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5257then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5258for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5259
5260This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5261Customize menu.
5262
5263** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5264the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5265
5266** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5267buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5268invoked.
5269
5270** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5271that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5272The default is 1.
5273
5274** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5275syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5276new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5277(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5278sensibly.
5279
5280** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5281
5282** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5283value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5284two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5285
5286** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5287reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5288for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5289every night.
5290
5291** Desktop changes
5292
5293*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5294the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5295
5296*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5297and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5298
5299** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5300read and post multi-lingual articles.
5301
5302** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5303doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5304be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5305outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5306the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5307made invisible again.
5308
5309** Mail reading and sending changes
5310
5311*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5312the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5313changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5314toggle.
5315
5316*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5317now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5318summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5319the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5320rmail-default-body-file.
5321
5322*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5323longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5324handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5325
5326*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5327it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5328is evaluated to insert the signature.
5329
5330*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5331outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5332handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5333putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5334transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5335especially interested in trying feedmail.
5336
5337feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5338feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5339provided by feedmail are:
5340
5341**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5342stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5343there is also a queue for draft messages
5344
5345**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5346be prompted for confirmation
5347
5348**** does smart filling of address headers
5349
5350**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5351the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5352can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5353
5354**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5355the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5356/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5357function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5358
5359** Dired changes
5360
5361*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5362files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5363
5364*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5365run Dired on the directory name at point.
5366
5367*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5368files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5369for a specified regexp.
5370
5371** VC Changes
5372
5373*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5374conveniently.
5375
5376*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5377faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5378Dired.
5379
5380VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5381directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5382listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5383currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5384
5385You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5386then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5387vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5388control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5389on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5390
5391All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5392is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5393`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5394the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5395`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5396
5397The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5398toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5399VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5400`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5401
5402Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5403ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5404command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5405
5406*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5407file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5408session to resolve them.
5409
5410Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5411resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5412contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5413uses as well).
5414
5415*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5416command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5417you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5418either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5419branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5420If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5421using ediff.
5422
5423** Changes in Font Lock
5424
5425*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5426are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5427use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5428unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5429compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5430
5431** Frame name display changes
5432
5433*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5434frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5435raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5436when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5437
5438*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5439frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5440menu.
5441
5442** Comint (subshell) changes
5443
5444*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5445subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5446with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5447
5448*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5449
5450C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5451that is, the line after the last line you got.
5452You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5453
5454C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5455send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5456the following line.
5457
5458C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5459which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5460previously sent input.
5461
5462C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5463it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5464as the search string.
5465
5466*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5467automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5468
5469** C mode changes
5470
5471*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5472and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5473assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5474definition.
5475
5476*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5477(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5478Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5479style is still the default however.
5480
5481*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5482
5483*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5484are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5485them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5486
5487*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5488and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5489
5490*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5491namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5492
5493*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5494makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5495
5496*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5497c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5498
5499*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5500should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5501package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5502variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5503
5504** Changes to hippie-expand.
5505
5506*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5507non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5508which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5509
5510*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5511non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5512expanding dynamically.
5513
5514*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5515non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5516
5517*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5518non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5519this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5520expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5521
5522*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5523
5524** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5525
5526*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5527bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5528automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5529bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5530against the first word in the title.
5531
5532*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5533capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5534bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5535lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5536lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5537bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5538
5539*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5540generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5541replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5542bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5543
5544** Changes in vcursor.el.
5545
5546*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5547and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5548variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5549entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5550`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5551in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5552
5553*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5554Editing group once the package is loaded.
5555
5556*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5557generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5558vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5559
5560*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5561vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5562
5563** Ispell changes.
5564
5565*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5566buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5567are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5568
5569*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5570A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5571and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5572defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5573include:
5574
5575 o URLs are automatically skipped
5576 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5577
5578*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5579
5580** Changes to RefTeX mode
5581
5582RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5583large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5584re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5585section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5586
5587*** New recursive parser.
5588
5589The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5590entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5591recursive parser scans the individual files.
5592
5593*** Parsing only part of a document.
5594
5595Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5596partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5597the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5598
5599 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5600
5601*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5602
5603This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5604
5605 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5606
5607*** Using multiple selection buffers
5608
5609If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5610for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5611
5612 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5613
5614*** References to external documents.
5615
5616The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5617documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5618documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5619macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5620RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5621the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5622The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5623
5624*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5625
5626The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5627and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5628
5629Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5630the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5631
5632*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5633
5634The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5635buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5636
5637*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5638
5639The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5640contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5641`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5642have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5643enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5644at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5645more.
5646
5647*** Support for the varioref package
5648
5649The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5650
5651*** New hooks
5652
5653Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5654and citations are created. These hooks are
5655`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5656`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5657
5658*** Citations outside LaTeX
5659
5660The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5661a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5662
5663*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5664
5665The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5666fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5667fontified, use
5668
5669 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5670
5671** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5672With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5673the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5674directories that contain the same file name.
5675
5676Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5677Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5678file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5679Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5680have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5681names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5682directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5683directory.
5684
5685** New modes and packages
5686
5687*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5688It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5689it, but some do not.
5690
5691*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5692code.
5693
5694*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5695current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5696around in a buffer.
5697
5698Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5699
5700*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5701uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5702be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5703established system of notation similar to Chess.
5704
5705*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5706documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5707guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5708
5709*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5710available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5711system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5712simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5713functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5714the like.
5715
5716*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5717identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5718
5719*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5720within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5721used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5722the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5723
5724*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5725
5726 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5727 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5728 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5729 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5730 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5731 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5732 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5733 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5734 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5735 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5736 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5737
5738 Platform-specific modes:
5739
5740 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5741 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5742 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5743 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5744 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5745 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5746 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5747 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5748 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5749\f
5750* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5751
5752** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5753use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5754That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5755Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5756
5757Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5758you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5759consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5760
5761** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5762and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5763specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5764searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5765
5766** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5767multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5768character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5769environment.
5770
5771** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5772take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5773string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5774current input method for reading this one event.
5775
5776** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5777now control whether to output certain characters as
5778backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5779non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5780characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5781in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5782\f
5783* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5784
5785** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5786of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5787
5788** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5789in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5790always increases point by 1.
5791
5792The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5793considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5794
5795See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5796
5797** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5798Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5799default value changed. For example,
5800
5801 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5802 :type 'integer
5803 :group 'foo
5804 :version "20.3")
5805
5806 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5807 :version "20.3")
5808
5809If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5810default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5811is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5812`:version' in the top level group.
5813
5814This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5815
5816** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5817starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5818
5819However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5820symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5821support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5822to themselves.
5823
5824If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5825this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5826values whatever.
5827
5828** There is a new debugger command, R.
5829It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5830in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5831
5832** Frame-local variables.
5833
5834You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5835the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5836local bindings for that variable.
5837
5838These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5839frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5840modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5841parameter name.
5842
5843Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5844Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5845active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5846that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5847
5848It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5849clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5850very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5851through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5852
5853** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5854"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5855evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5856makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5857See the documentation in sregex.el.
5858
5859** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5860is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5861parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5862The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5863
5864** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5865If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5866
5867** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5868known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5869define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5870
5871** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5872when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5873it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5874history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5875
5876The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5877return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5878empty input.
5879
5880** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5881for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5882`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5883Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5884`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5885
5886** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5887echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5888a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5889default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5890
5891** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5892specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5893function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5894place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5895non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5896
5897** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5898If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5899up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5900end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5901
5902** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5903which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5904If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5905
5906** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5907holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5908was directed to display this buffer.
5909
5910** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5911with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5912describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5913other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5914set-window-configuration.
5915
5916** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5917window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5918positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5919windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5920
5921** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5922override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5923look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5924
5925If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5926non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5927map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5928
5929minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5930and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5931
5932** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5933except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5934
5935** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5936USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5937floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5938
5939** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5940to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5941in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5942it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5943
5944** Menu changes
5945
5946*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5947keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5948better supported.
5949
5950The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5951a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5952you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5953can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5954then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5955
5956*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5957
5958In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5959 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5960defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5961starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5962
5963The format is:
5964 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5965 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5966where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5967string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5968The supported properties include
5969
5970:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5971 item is enabled.
5972:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5973 item should appear in the menu.
5974:filter FILTER-FN
5975 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5976 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5977 It should return a binding to use instead.
5978:keys DESCRIPTION
5979 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5980 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5981 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5982:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5983 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5984 keyboard binding.
5985:key-sequence nil
5986 This means that the command normally has no
5987 keyboard equivalent.
5988:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5989:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5990 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5991 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5992 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5993
5994Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5995Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5996
5997(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5998
5999** New event types
6000
6001*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
6002mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
6003corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6004which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6005
6006 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6007
6008where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6009same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6010indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6011negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6012the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6013forward, away from the user.
6014
6015As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6016
6017*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6018files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6019and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6020filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6021loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6022
6023 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6024
6025where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6026same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6027that were dragged and dropped.
6028
6029As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6030
6031** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6032
6033*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6034any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6035to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6036
6037*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6038can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6039that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6040
6041*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6042in Emacs 19 and before.
6043
6044The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6045The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6046
6047*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6048buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6049unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6050representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6051
6052This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6053as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6054viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6055one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6056will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6057
6058This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6059representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6060(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6061consistent with the new representation.
6062
6063*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6064representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6065about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6066however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6067
6068The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6069nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6070using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6071
6072*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6073representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6074representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6075
6076The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6077loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6078is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6079
6080*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6081which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6082
6083*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6084which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6085
6086*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6087portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6088so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6089You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6090
6091*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6092it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6093
6094*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6095convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6096buffer or string being searched.
6097
6098One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6099[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6100searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6101searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6102obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6103you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6104expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6105
6106*** Structure of coding system changed.
6107
6108All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6109by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6110which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6111as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6112vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6113your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6114define-coding-system-alias.
6115
6116The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6117the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6118access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6119pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6120character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6121safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6122'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6123`iso-8859-1'.
6124
6125Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6126The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6127coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6128(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6129
6130Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6131also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6132are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6133the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6134
6135*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6136proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6137This function requires a user interaction.
6138
6139*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6140find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6141select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6142systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6143a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6144select-safe-coding-system.
6145
6146*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6147decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6148last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6149was done.
6150
6151*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6152used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6153coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6154
6155*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6156return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6157characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6158`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6159
6160*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6161coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6162coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6163converted.
6164
6165*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6166coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6167
6168*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6169character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6170character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6171each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6172either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6173range of characters.
6174
6175*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6176Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6177
6178*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6179in the current buffer at position POS.
6180
6181*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6182input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6183function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6184character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6185event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6186binding input-method-function to nil.
6187
6188The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6189method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6190input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6191the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6192not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6193
6194The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6195subsequent events of a key sequence.
6196
6197*** You can customize any language environment by using
6198set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6199
6200The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6201customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6202instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6203environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6204exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6205\f
6206* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6207
6208** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6209options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6210at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6211tree structure.
6212
6213M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6214user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6215
6216With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6217session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6218in your .emacs file.)
6219
6220** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6221You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6222
6223** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6224This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6225
6226** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6227immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6228kills the region.
6229
6230The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6231delete the character before point, as usual.
6232
6233** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6234on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6235by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6236
6237** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6238insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6239the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6240onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6241history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6242past.)
6243
6244** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6245This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6246in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6247TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6248makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6249
6250As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6251and is an alias for it.
6252
6253If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6254use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6255
6256** Scrolling changes
6257
6258*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6259position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6260
6261In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6262on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6263where it started.
6264
6265*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6266move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6267screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6268does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6269
6270*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6271top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6272comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6273recenters the window.
6274
6275** International character set support (MULE)
6276
6277Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6278including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6279Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6280Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6281features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6282MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6283
6284Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6285coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6286character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6287variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6288into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6289
6290Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6291generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6292supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6293language, to make it possible to type them.
6294
6295The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6296character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6297
6298The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6299to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6300
6301You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6302
6303 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6304
6305Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6306characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6307argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6308already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6309characters for their work until they want to change.
6310
6311*** Input methods
6312
6313An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6314specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6315has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6316the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6317support several input methods.
6318
6319The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6320another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6321work.
6322
6323A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6324characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6325composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6326consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6327sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6328letter.
6329
6330The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6331by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6332First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6333marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6334mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6335
6336None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6337they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6338phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6339converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6340
6341Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6342word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6343typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6344the first guess is wrong.
6345
6346*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6347turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6348
6349If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6350byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6351they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6352the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6353
6354However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6355use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6356includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6357translate automatically to and from either one.
6358
6359*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6360
6361Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6362file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6363sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6364what you want.
6365
6366If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6367example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6368system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6369multibyte characters in that buffer.
6370
6371If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6372character conversion as well.
6373
6374*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6375
6376A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6377Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6378requires using many fonts.
6379
6380Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6381collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6382
6383A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6384the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6385have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6386you would use a font.
6387
6388If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6389specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6390display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6391
6392The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6393(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6394characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6395or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6396and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6397
6398*** Defining fontsets.
6399
6400Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6401chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6402with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6403
6404Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6405of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6406`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6407standard fontset are created automatically.
6408
6409If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6410argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6411FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6412with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6413name is `fontset-startup'.
6414
6415Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6416The resource value should have this form:
6417 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6418FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6419 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6420 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6421 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6422The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6423of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6424CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6425FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6426
6427Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6428last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6429You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6430
6431For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6432font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6433following resource,
6434 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6435the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6436 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6437Here is the substitution rule:
6438 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6439 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6440 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6441 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6442 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6443
6444The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6445fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6446that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6447
6448With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6449like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6450name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6451fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6452fontsets.
6453
6454*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6455defaults for a particular choice of language.
6456
6457Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6458method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6459visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6460already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6461language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6462system for new files that you create.
6463
6464It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6465set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6466whole Emacs session.
6467
6468For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6469chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6470with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6471
6472*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6473specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6474specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6475the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6476coding systems that Emacs supports.
6477
6478*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6479lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6480This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6481After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6482is used for *the immediately following command*.
6483
6484So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6485write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6486
6487If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6488then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6489
6490For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6491visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6492
6493*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6494construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6495to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6496specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6497of the file.
6498
6499*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6500the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6501code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6502translated into that character code.
6503
6504This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6505various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6506
6507By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6508
6509*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6510the coding system for keyboard input.
6511
6512Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6513with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6514some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6515
6516By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6517
6518Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6519input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6520translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6521to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6522designed to work with terminals.
6523
6524*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6525specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6526This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6527has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6528translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6529in the corresponding buffer.
6530
6531By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6532
6533*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6534to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6535It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6536
6537*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6538an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6539command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6540want to use.
6541
6542C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6543method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6544
6545*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6546layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6547remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6548which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6549
6550*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6551the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6552related information.
6553
6554*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6555HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6556scripts.
6557
6558*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6559information about the support for a particular language.
6560You specify the language as an argument.
6561
6562*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6563the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6564first dash.
6565
6566A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6567(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6568whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
65691 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6570
6571 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6572 B big5 (Chinese)
6573 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6574 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6575 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6576 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6577 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6578 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6579 K euc-korea (Korean)
6580 R koi8 (Russian)
6581 Q tibetan
6582 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6583 T lao
6584 T tis620 (Thai)
6585 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6586 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6587 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6588 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6589 z hz (Chinese)
6590
6591When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6592two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6593coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6594keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6595
6596*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6597conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6598
6599When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6600into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6601rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6602Rmail files themselves.
6603
6604*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6605conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6606
6607Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6608for sending mail:
6609
6610- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6611- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6612- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6613 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6614- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6615
6616*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6617to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6618Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6619translations.
6620
6621** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6622of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6623insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6624without any conversion.
6625
6626** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6627You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6628RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6629any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6630
6631** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6632functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6633
6634Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6635Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6636
6637Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6638mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6639
6640** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6641complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6642in the buffer before point.
6643
6644With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6645symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6646you are using.
6647
6648With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6649just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6650
6651** File locking works with NFS now.
6652
6653The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6654in the same directory as FILENAME.
6655
6656This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6657works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6658can become a bottleneck.
6659
6660The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6661does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6662create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6663file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6664rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6665so useful that the change is worth while.
6666
6667When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6668are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6669collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6670tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6671
6672** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6673it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6674show-paren-mode.
6675
6676** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6677selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6678delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6679
6680** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6681within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6682complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6683
6684** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6685it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6686set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6687
6688** Changes in View mode.
6689
6690*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6691Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6692
6693*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6694view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6695
6696*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6697previous state.
6698
6699*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6700scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6701
6702*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6703non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6704not just the selected window.
6705
6706*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6707read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6708turns View mode on or off.
6709
6710*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6711how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6712delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6713
6714** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6715now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6716
6717** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6718has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6719presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6720which version to compare with.
6721
6722** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6723blocks if a match is inside the block.
6724
6725The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6726is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6727isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6728shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6729
6730By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6731of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6732blocks, all of them or none.
6733
6734** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6735current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6736confirmation first.
6737
6738** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6739now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6740However, the mode will not be changed if
6741(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6742(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6743 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6744(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6745
6746This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6747
6748However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6749these commands do not change the major mode.
6750
6751** M-x occur changes.
6752
6753*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6754it performs a case-sensitive search.
6755
6756*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6757if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6758using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6759
6760** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6761in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6762window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6763that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6764buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6765
6766** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6767after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6768appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6769come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6770
6771** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6772selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6773buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6774
6775** Outline mode changes.
6776
6777*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6778
6779*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6780
6781** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6782you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6783Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6784was already active.
6785
6786The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6787unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6788get confused by it.
6789
6790If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6791set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6792
6793** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6794
6795*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6796conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6797character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6798including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6799
6800The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6801mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6802copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6803
6804*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6805are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6806values.
6807
6808`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6809case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6810`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6811case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6812
6813** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6814certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6815can be. The default value is 30.
6816
6817** Changes in Mail mode.
6818
6819*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6820Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6821composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6822`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6823`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6824behavior.
6825
6826C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6827compose-mail-other-frame.
6828
6829*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6830the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6831replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6832buffer that shows the original message.
6833
6834*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6835with separator lines around the contents.
6836
6837*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6838in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6839definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6840need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6841
6842*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6843
6844**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6845for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6846controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6847Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6848
6849**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6850to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6851/etc/passwd.
6852
6853**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6854to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6855/etc/passwd.
6856
6857** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6858special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6859directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6860reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6861
6862Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6863when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6864be taken to be magic.
6865
6866** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6867files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6868available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6869
6870M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6871(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6872
6873** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6874suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6875
6876In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6877
6878new key dired.el binding old key
6879------- ---------------- -------
6880 * c dired-change-marks c
6881 * m dired-mark m
6882 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6883 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6884 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6885 * u dired-unmark u
6886 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6887 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6888 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6889 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6890 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6891 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6892
6893** Rmail changes.
6894
6895*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6896saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6897chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6898each time you run it.
6899
6900*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6901whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6902
6903*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6904messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6905means to move in the opposite direction.
6906
6907*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6908you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6909
6910*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6911just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6912It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6913can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6914for output.
6915
6916** Gnus changes.
6917
6918*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6919
6920*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6921Gnus.
6922
6923*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6924`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6925
6926*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6927article mode line.
6928
6929*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6930
6931*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6932
6933(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6934
6935*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6936are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6937`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6938
6939*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6940
6941*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6942
6943*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6944See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6945
6946*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6947Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6948used to pick articles.
6949
6950*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6951another have been added.
6952
6953 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6954
6955*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6956generating lines in buffers.
6957
6958*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6959`M-C-_'.
6960
6961*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6962
6963*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6964
6965 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6966
6967*** Scores can be decayed.
6968
6969 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6970
6971*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6972Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6973
6974*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6975the native server.
6976
6977 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6978
6979*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6980(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6981
6982*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6983
6984*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6985even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6986
6987*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6988(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6989
6990 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6991 a group.
6992
6993*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6994sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6995
6996 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6997
6998*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6999
7000 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
7001
7002*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
7003
7004 Use the `Y c' command.
7005
7006*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7007
7008*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7009
7010 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7011
7012*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7013from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7014
7015 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7016
7017*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7018
7019*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7020the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7021
7022 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7023
7024Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7025and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7026from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7027hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7028this issue.)
7029
7030Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7031automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7032particular news group. This can be done by:
7033
7034 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7035
7036Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7037of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7038"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7039system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7040for reading and posting).
7041
7042CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7043 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7044Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7045newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7046there.
7047
7048Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7049default. Here are some of these default settings:
7050
7051 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7052 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7053 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7054 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7055 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7056
7057When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7058the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7059
7060** CC mode changes.
7061
7062*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7063code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7064values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7065this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7066Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7067loaded.
7068
7069If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7070Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7071style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7072share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7073c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7074must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7075
7076*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7077of the current buffer.
7078
7079*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7080it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7081of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7082
7083*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7084style that the Python developers like.
7085
7086*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7087This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7088just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7089
7090** VC Changes [new]
7091
7092** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7093name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7094directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7095
7096This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7097master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7098developers.
7099
7100You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7101RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7102
7103*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7104other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7105writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7106calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7107
7108*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7109version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7110
7111** Calendar changes.
7112
7113A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7114of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7115for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7116
7117** ps-print changes
7118
7119There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7120
7121*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7122
7123The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7124formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7125`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7126`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7127It defaults to `letter'.
7128If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7129
7130The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7131of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7132non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7133
7134The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7135It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7136It defaults to 1.
7137
7138*** Horizontal layout
7139
7140The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7141`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7142All are measured in points.
7143
7144*** Vertical layout
7145
7146The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7147`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7148All are measured in points.
7149
7150*** Headers
7151
7152If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7153`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7154margin above the text.
7155
7156If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7157framing box is printed around the header.
7158
7159The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7160`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7161
7162The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7163`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7164`ps-header-font-size'.
7165
7166*** Font managing
7167
7168The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7169used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7170`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7171elements to this alist.
7172
7173The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7174for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7175
7176** hideshow changes.
7177
7178*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7179C++, ; for lisp).
7180
7181*** Support for java-mode added.
7182
7183*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7184in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7185
7186*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7187the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7188way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7189
7190*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7191robust and a lot faster.
7192
7193*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7194
7195*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7196to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7197documentation for more details.
7198
7199** Changes in Enriched mode.
7200
7201*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7202filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7203of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7204use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7205the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7206
7207*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7208distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7209as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7210as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7211
7212** Font Lock mode
7213
7214*** Custom support
7215
7216The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7217font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7218faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7219group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7220your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7221consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7222
7223You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7224
7225*** Maximum decoration
7226
7227Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7228default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7229of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7230supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7231to get the old behavior.
7232
7233*** New support
7234
7235Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7236
7237Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7238support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7239
7240*** Configurable support
7241
7242Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7243additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7244c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7245java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7246list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7247of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7248convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7249
7250Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7251way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7252it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7253
7254*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7255
7256You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7257highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7258for any mode.
7259
7260For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7261
7262 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7263
7264in your ~/.emacs.
7265
7266*** New faces
7267
7268Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7269font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7270distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7271to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7272
7273*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7274
7275The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7276cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7277same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7278
7279*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7280
7281The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7282according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7283the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7284non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7285refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7286the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7287Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7288
7289This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7290For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7291this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7292refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7293containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7294the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7295
7296As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7297
7298Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7299Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7300Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7301new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7302
7303If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7304settings.
7305
7306** Ada mode changes.
7307
7308*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7309If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7310procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7311you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7312stubs.
7313
7314*** There are two new commands:
7315 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7316 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7317
7318The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7319`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7320`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7321
7322*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7323is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7324Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7325
7326*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7327formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7328places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7329space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7330
7331** Scheme mode changes.
7332
7333*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7334mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7335for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7336with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7337have any effect.
7338
7339If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7340still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7341scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7342variables as buffer-local variables.
7343
7344*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7345Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7346
7347** Changes to the emacsclient program
7348
7349*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7350USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7351associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7352can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7353
7354*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7355it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7356buffer in Emacs.
7357
7358*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7359use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7360ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7361option takes precedence.
7362
7363** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7364constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7365(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7366
7367** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7368which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7369the current defun.
7370
7371** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7372following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7373
7374** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7375and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7376necessary).
7377
7378** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7379if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7380these register values no longer become completely useless.
7381If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7382asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7383it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7384
7385** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7386example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7387be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7388you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7389
7390You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7391variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7392file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7393revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7394only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7395
7396** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7397since it applies only to the current frame.
7398
7399** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7400file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7401and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7402
7403This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7404multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7405variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7406tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7407instead of just the file you are editing.
7408
7409** RefTeX mode
7410
7411RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7412and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7413different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7414multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7415turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7416
7417C-c ( reftex-label
7418 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7419 knows which kind of label is needed.
7420
7421C-c ) reftex-reference
7422 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7423 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7424
7425C-c [ reftex-citation
7426 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7427 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7428
7429C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7430 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7431
7432C-c = reftex-toc
7433 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7434 can quickly jump to every section.
7435
7436Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7437commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7438Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7439reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7440C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7441
7442** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7443
7444*** Info documentation is now available.
7445
7446*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7447both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7448
7449*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7450bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7451
7452*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7453(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7454
7455*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7456entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7457appropriate functions.
7458
7459*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7460entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7461
7462*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7463been cleaned.
7464
7465*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7466bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7467
7468*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7469shall be delimited.
7470
7471*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7472bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7473bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7474
7475*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7476field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7477prefixed with `ALT'.
7478
7479*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7480bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7481formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7482documentation).
7483
7484*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7485documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7486for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7487
7488*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7489comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7490
7491*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7492alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7493signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7494
7495*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7496
7497*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7498
7499*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7500from alien sources.
7501
7502*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7503to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7504crossref entries.
7505
7506*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7507region.
7508
7509*** Added support for imenu.
7510
7511*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7512of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7513`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7514`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7515
7516*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7517from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7518
7519** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7520
7521** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7522
7523** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7524functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7525Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7526as an argument.
7527
7528When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7529and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7530
7531** browse-url changes
7532
7533*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7534Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7535(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7536non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7537customization variables.
7538
7539*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7540
7541*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7542lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7543(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7544
7545** Changes in Ediff
7546
7547*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7548pops up the Info file for this command.
7549
7550*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7551the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7552merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7553directories).
7554
7555*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7556and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7557files in the same directory.
7558
7559*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7560The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7561related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7562
7563** Changes in Viper
7564
7565*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7566*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7567 instead of vip-.
7568*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7569*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7570Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7571*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7572*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7573*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7574color when Viper is in insert state.
7575*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7576Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7577viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7578
7579** Etags changes.
7580
7581*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7582default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7583Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7584variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7585not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7586
7587*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7588
7589*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7590constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7591
7592*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7593recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7594In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7595
7596*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7597C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7598recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7599methods and protocols.
7600
7601*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7602.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7603column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7604paragraph name.
7605
7606*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7607an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7608at least M times and as many as N times.
7609
7610** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7611in files has changed slightly.
7612
7613With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7614time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7615This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7616with old time-stamp-format values.
7617
7618In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7619(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7620This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7621reasons.
7622
7623In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7624natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7625fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7626(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7627time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7628specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7629
7630Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7631case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7632truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7633
7634The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7635being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7636future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7637recommended now will continue to work then.
7638
7639See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7640details.
7641
7642** There are some additional major modes:
7643
7644dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7645m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7646meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7647
7648** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7649copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7650into Emacs.
7651
7652** New Lisp packages include:
7653
7654*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7655
7656*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7657be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7658
7659*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7660
7661*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7662in shell buffers.
7663
7664*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7665See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7666and `elint-defun'.
7667
7668*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7669meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7670ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7671strings or comments.
7672
7673These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7674abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7675you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7676insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7677at these points.
7678
7679*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7680can visit them by short forms of their names.
7681
7682*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7683Emacs Lisp function at point.
7684
7685*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7686
7687*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7688switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7689
7690*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7691
7692*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7693
7694*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7695
7696*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7697from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7698
7699*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7700You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7701inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7702original place after inserting the copy.
7703
7704*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7705on the buffer.
7706
7707You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7708velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7709(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7710
7711Enable mouse-drag with:
7712 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7713-or-
7714 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7715
7716*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7717mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7718
7719*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7720It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7721
7722*** ogonek
7723
7724The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7725Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7726platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7727TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7728ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7729prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7730instance) and vice versa.
7731
7732To use this package load it using
7733 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7734Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7735 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7736 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7737The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7738ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7739
7740*** Interface to ph.
7741
7742Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7743
7744The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7745services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7746these servers.
7747
7748*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7749
7750*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7751You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7752while the real cursor does not move.
7753
7754*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7755for visiting your favorite web sites.
7756
7757*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7758so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7759
7760** movemail change
7761
7762Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7763mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7764supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7765user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7766
7767This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7768\f
7769* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7770
7771** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7772
7773Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7774end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7775Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7776file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7777file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7778
7779To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7780C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7781coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7782specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7783LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7784save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7785\f
7786* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7787
7788** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7789Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7790vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7791Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7792
7793** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7794to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7795
7796In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7797don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7798"win".
7799
7800** Basic Lisp changes
7801
7802*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7803evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7804
7805*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7806be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7807or by the user.
7808
7809The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7810
7811*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7812
7813(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7814(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7815
7816*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7817usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7818its argument.
7819
7820*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7821
7822*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7823
7824*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7825
7826*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7827error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7828include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7829`format' function.
7830
7831*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7832or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7833whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7834
7835*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7836either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7837adding one of these suffixes.
7838
7839*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7840which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7841If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7842
7843We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7844because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7845
7846*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7847
7848*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7849You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7850
7851*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7852conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7853
7854 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7855
7856BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7857BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7858
7859*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7860choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7861restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7862works using `save-current-buffer'.
7863
7864*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7865write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7866of the last form.
7867
7868*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7869which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7870last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7871as the last form.
7872
7873*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7874characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7875matches.
7876
7877For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7878
7879*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7880with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7881Then it returns that string.
7882
7883For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7884
7885(with-output-to-string
7886 (princ "The buffer is ")
7887 (princ (buffer-name)))
7888
7889returns "The buffer is foo".
7890
7891** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7892is non-nil.
7893
7894These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7895buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7896characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7897
7898*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7899a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7900
7901Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7902character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7903Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7904position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7905characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7906 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7907
7908ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7909Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7910non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7911characters".
7912
7913The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7914through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7915"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7916range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7917leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7918
7919*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7920(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7921multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7922character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7923
7924This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7925always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7926
7927However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7928
7929*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7930because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7931have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7932the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7933guaranteed.
7934
7935*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7936between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7937character).
7938
7939When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7940
7941 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7942 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7943 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7944 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7945 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7946
7947*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7948
7949*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7950`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7951more than the number of characters.
7952
7953You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7954it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7955\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7956is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7957follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7958newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7959
7960*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7961and returns a string containing those characters.
7962
7963*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7964(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7965counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7966character, sref signals an error.
7967
7968*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7969in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7970string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7971
7972*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7973in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7974region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7975
7976*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7977the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7978to a vector of the characters in it.
7979
7980*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7981of a string. You call it as follows:
7982
7983 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7984
7985This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7986STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7987This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7988Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7989it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7990
7991*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7992if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7993
7994*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7995if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7996
7997*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7998to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7999not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
8000which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
8001
8002(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
8003
8004This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8005
8006The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8007If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8008are not included in the resulting value.
8009
8010The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8011at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8012WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8013is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8014
8015If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8016place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8017character extends across that column), then the padding character
8018PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8019string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8020column START-COLUMN.
8021
8022*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8023the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8024necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8025difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8026changed text, before the change.
8027
8028*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8029sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8030one character set for each script, not for each language.
8031
8032**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8033
8034**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8035
8036**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8037set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8038
8039**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8040name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8041which identify the character within that character set.
8042
8043**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8044byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8045opposite of split-char.
8046
8047**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8048of all the characters between BEG and END.
8049
8050**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8051of all the characters in a string.
8052
8053*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8054and specifying coding systems.
8055
8056**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8057system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8058of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8059(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8060and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8061as what to do about code conversion.)
8062
8063**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8064name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8065
8066**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8067for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8068except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8069
8070Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8071which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8072to match against a file name.
8073
8074VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8075a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8076decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8077to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8078systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8079specifies the coding system for encoding.
8080
8081If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8082or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8083
8084**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8085the coding system to use for network sockets.
8086
8087Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8088which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8089either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8090service names.
8091
8092VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8093a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8094decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8095to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8096systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8097specifies the coding system for encoding.
8098
8099If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8100or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8101
8102**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8103for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8104except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8105start the subprocess.
8106
8107**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8108systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8109when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8110(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8111to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8112
8113**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8114coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8115subprocess.
8116
8117It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8118but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8119start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8120connection permanently or until overridden.
8121
8122The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8123file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8124network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8125coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8126It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8127system for one operation at a time.
8128
8129**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8130files, subprocesses or network connections.
8131
8132**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8133coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8134The value is a cons cell,
8135 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8136where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8137the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8138input to the subprocess.
8139
8140**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8141change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8142
8143** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8144customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8145you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8146
8147You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8148variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8149information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8150legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8151customization.
8152
8153Thus, instead of writing
8154
8155 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8156 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8157
8158you would now write this:
8159
8160 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8161 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8162 :type 'boolean
8163 :group foo)
8164
8165The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8166two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8167describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8168for a description of them.
8169
8170The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8171should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8172
8173 (defgroup ispell nil
8174 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8175 :group 'processes)
8176
8177The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8178group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8179but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8180to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8181second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8182
8183Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8184package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8185have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8186package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8187first-level subgroups.
8188
8189** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8190
8191This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8192separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8193
8194** easy-mmode
8195
8196The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8197developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8198only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8199predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8200`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8201`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8202
8203** Text property changes
8204
8205*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8206text property.
8207
8208*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8209previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8210place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8211functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8212starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8213
8214If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8215LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8216of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8217position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8218
8219*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8220value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8221is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8222
8223** Changes in invisibility features
8224
8225*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8226hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8227is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8228should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8229would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8230make the overlay visible.
8231
8232During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8233invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8234needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8235which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8236the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8237t when it should hide it.
8238
8239*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8240
8241Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8242invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8243and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8244Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8245manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8246Here is an example of how to do this:
8247
8248 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8249 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8250 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8251 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8252
8253 ...
8254 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8255
8256 ...
8257 ;; When done with the overlays:
8258 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8259 ;; Or respectively:
8260 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8261
8262** Changes in syntax parsing.
8263
8264*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8265`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8266obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8267`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8268
8269If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8270is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8271used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8272
8273When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8274character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8275
8276 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8277 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8278
8279 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8280 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8281 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8282
8283 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8284 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8285 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8286 determine the syntax type of the character.
8287
8288 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8289 of the current buffer.
8290
8291*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8292value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8293for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8294
8295*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8296and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8297only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8298character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8299another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8300
8301These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8302text property.
8303
8304*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8305arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8306of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8307
8308*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8309(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8310element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8311nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8312string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8313
8314*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8315syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8316`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8317
8318** Changes in face features
8319
8320*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8321if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8322
8323*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8324of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8325
8326*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8327set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8328
8329*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8330set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8331
8332*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8333by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8334and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8335the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8336overlay property).
8337
8338This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8339arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8340
8341** Changes in file-handling functions
8342
8343*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8344directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8345they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8346is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8347
8348This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8349begins with ~.
8350
8351*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8352it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8353
8354*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8355the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8356
8357*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8358as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8359
8360*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8361character code conversion as well as other things.
8362
8363Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8364(formerly it did not).
8365
8366*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8367environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8368
8369*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8370instead of constant strings.
8371
8372*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8373to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8374any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8375
8376substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8377in the same way as before.
8378
8379*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8380The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8381which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8382
8383*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8384error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8385else, and returns nil.
8386
8387*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8388directory cannot be listed.
8389
8390** Changes in minibuffer input
8391
8392*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8393read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8394additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8395argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8396ways:
8397
8398 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8399 It is available through the history command M-n.
8400
8401*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8402read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8403argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8404minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8405enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8406
8407In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8408argument in this way.
8409
8410*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8411from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8412minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8413
8414** Echo area features
8415
8416*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8417echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8418minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8419after the echo area is cleared.
8420
8421*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8422in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8423
8424** Keyboard input features
8425
8426*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8427set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8428
8429*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8430received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8431by keyboard macros.
8432
8433** Frame-related changes
8434
8435*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8436creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8437hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8438
8439*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8440the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8441has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8442
8443*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8444selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8445value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8446in the selected frame.
8447
8448*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8449is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8450which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8451
8452** X Windows features
8453
8454*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8455x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8456x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8457
8458*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8459The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8460
8461*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8462MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8463A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8464
8465If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8466it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8467
8468** Subprocess features
8469
8470*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8471functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8472automatically.
8473
8474*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8475and returns the output from the command as a string.
8476
8477*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8478and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8479
8480** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8481does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8482
8483** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8484at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8485goes after the other menu items.
8486
8487** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8488of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8489around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8490are in use.
8491
8492The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8493series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8494
8495Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8496after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8497form.
8498
8499** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8500is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8501but its hook is still run.
8502
8503** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8504for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8505
8506If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8507regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8508useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8509
8510This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8511are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8512filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8513warned.
8514
8515** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8516way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8517
8518** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8519integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8520functions like display-time.
8521
8522** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8523name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8524
8525** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8526can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8527is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8528
8529** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8530if there is an error in compilation.
8531
8532** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8533switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8534argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8535they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8536
8537** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8538Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8539the *scratch* buffer.
8540
8541** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8542The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8543where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8544e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8545
8546** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8547and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8548It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8549
8550** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8551using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8552variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8553and compose-mail-other-frame.
8554
8555** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8556can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8557full name of the specified user will be returned.
8558
8559** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8560of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8561where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8562in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8563option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8564files at all.
8565
8566** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8567and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8568width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8569the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8570
8571For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8572minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8573with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8574is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8575
8576** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8577
8578** imenu.el changes.
8579
8580You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8581item from menu created by imenu.
8582
8583An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8584#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8585select one of those items.
8586\f
8587* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8588\f
8589* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8590
8591** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8592mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8593
8594** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8595use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8596Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8597\f
8598* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8599
8600** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8601To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8602
8603** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8604conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8605matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8606expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8607word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8608all caps.
8609
8610** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8611at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8612
8613When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8614does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8615as in previous Emacs versions.
8616
8617** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8618non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8619time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8620frames.
8621
8622** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8623if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8624This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8625Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8626accident.
8627
8628** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8629keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8630It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8631line and then executing the macro.
8632
8633This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8634
8635** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8636(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8637characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8638characters.
8639
8640** Font Lock mode
8641
8642*** Font Lock support modes
8643
8644Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8645below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8646hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8647to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8648Font Lock mode is enabled.
8649
8650For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8651
8652 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8653
8654in your ~/.emacs.
8655
8656*** lazy-lock
8657
8658The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8659only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8660becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8661Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8662occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8663buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8664Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8665
8666To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8667
8668 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8669
8670To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8671
8672** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8673
8674*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8675paren and key.
8676
8677*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8678supported.
8679
8680** Gnus changes.
8681
8682Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8683commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8684significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8685previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8686
8687Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8688between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8689
8690*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8691variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8692obsolete.
8693
8694*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8695missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8696
8697 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8698
8699*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8700
8701 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8702
8703*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8704referred.
8705
8706*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8707
8708 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8709
8710*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8711
8712 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8713
8714*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8715buffers.
8716
8717 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8718
8719*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8720
8721 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8722
8723*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8724
8725 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8726
8727*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8728
8729 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8730
8731*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8732is possible.
8733
8734 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8735
8736*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8737groups of groups.
8738
8739*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8740
8741*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8742batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8743
8744*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8745
8746*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8747
8748*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8749
8750 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8751
8752*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8753expiration times.
8754
8755*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8756
8757*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8758process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8759
8760*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8761articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8762bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8763
8764*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8765articles with the `*' command.
8766
8767*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8768
8769*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8770
8771 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8772
8773*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8774
8775*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8776`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8777
8778*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8779buffer.
8780
8781*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8782
8783*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8784
8785*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8786
8787 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8788
8789*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8790
8791 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8792
8793*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8794
8795*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8796
8797*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8798
8799 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8800 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8801
8802*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8803refetching.
8804
8805 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8806
8807*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8808buffer to allow easier treatment.
8809
8810*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8811
8812*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8813
8814 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8815
8816*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8817articles.
8818
8819 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8820
8821*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8822
8823*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8824cited text to hide is now customizable.
8825
8826 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8827
8828*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8829
8830 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8831
8832*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8833
8834*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8835
8836The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8837in greater detail.
8838\f
8839* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8840
8841** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8842second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8843asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8844exists.
8845
8846** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8847as well as lists.
8848
8849** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8850of a given keymap.
8851
8852** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8853given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8854keymap or nil.
8855
8856** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8857an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8858name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8859menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8860equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8861alias.
8862\f
8863* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8864
8865** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8866
8867Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8868This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8869was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8870far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8871pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8872
8873For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8874you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8875`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8876
8877** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8878
8879The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8880do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8881It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8882much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8883chapter of the manual for details.
8884
8885However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8886customization variables take effect.
8887
8888** Marking with the mouse.
8889
8890When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8891highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8892using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8893
8894** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8895
8896*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8897
8898*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8899to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8900
8901*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8902in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8903you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8904application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8905applications, these problems are significant.
8906
8907If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8908likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8909However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8910will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8911other DOS application as a subprocess.
8912
8913Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8914You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8915
8916If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8917subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8918have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8919Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8920separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8921Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8922
8923** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8924
8925This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8926which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8927minibuffer contains.
8928
8929** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8930
8931The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8932It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8933It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8934affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8935
8936The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8937it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8938and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8939when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8940
8941** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8942enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8943
8944** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8945F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8946Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8947
8948If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8949menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8950something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8951the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8952
8953 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8954
8955** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8956to replace the characters it "deletes".
8957
8958** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8959
8960** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8961a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8962select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8963It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8964immediately after the selected one.
8965
8966This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8967made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8968
8969** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8970
8971Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8972directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8973If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8974Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8975recover-session.
8976
8977You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8978auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8979will not work.
8980
8981Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8982normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8983this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8984bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8985now that the bug is fixed.
8986
8987** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8988
8989There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8990when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8991Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8992which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8993
8994If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8995telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8996VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8997the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8998
8999** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
9000Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
9001is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
9002
9003There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
9004Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
9005enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
9006The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
9007remain normal.
9008
9009** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
9010header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
9011
9012Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
9013known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
9014offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
9015Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
9016
9017Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
9018of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
9019a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
9020name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
9021documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
9022`mail-directory-stream'.)
9023
9024** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
9025skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
9026characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
9027with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
9028
9029Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
9030- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
9031wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
9032
9033The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
9034less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
9035headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
9036Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
9037Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
9038fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
9039to a limitation in font-lock).
9040
9041External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
9042
9043** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
9044buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
9045buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
9046this example:
9047
9048 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
9049 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
9050
9051** Changes in BibTeX mode.
9052
9053*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
9054
9055*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
9056
9057*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
9058
9059*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
9060entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
9061will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
9062isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
9063(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
9064The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
9065
9066*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
9067does the same job.
9068
9069*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
9070"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
9071
9072*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
9073text.
9074
9075** Font Lock mode
9076
9077*** Global Font Lock mode
9078
9079Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
9080new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
9081font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
9082turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
9083on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
9084
9085For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
9086
9087 (global-font-lock-mode t)
9088
9089in your ~/.emacs.
9090
9091*** Local Refontification
9092
9093In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
9094However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
9095those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
9096command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9097
9098In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9099(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9100current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9101above and below point.
9102
9103With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9104
9105** Follow mode
9106
9107Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9108buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9109side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9110they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9111split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9112follow-mode.
9113
9114M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9115
9116To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9117command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9118
9119** hide-show changes.
9120
9121The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9122to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9123normal hooks.
9124
9125** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9126The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9127
9128** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9129recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9130those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9131
9132** MSDOS Changes
9133
9134*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9135Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9136
9137*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9138and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9139
9140*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9141
9142*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9143pressing both mouse buttons.
9144
9145*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9146restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9147are:
9148
9149**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9150now works.
9151
9152**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9153
9154**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9155implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9156
9157**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9158
9159**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9160
9161**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9162
9163**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9164
9165**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9166\f
9167* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9168
9169** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9170tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9171remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9172this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9173behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9174
9175** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9176
9177The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9178not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9179need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9180be different.
9181
9182It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9183than `system-type'.
9184
9185See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9186
9187** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9188now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9189
9190** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9191that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9192
9193** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9194no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9195reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9196
9197The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9198to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9199like this:
9200
9201 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9202
9203SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9204It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9205becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9206
9207REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9208seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9209means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9210
9211*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9212up if too much time passes.
9213
9214 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9215
9216This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9217If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9218of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9219form in BODY.
9220
9221*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9222a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9223call looks like this:
9224
9225 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9226
9227SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9228runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9229timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9230ARGS.
9231
9232Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9233command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9234command.
9235
9236REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9237time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9238does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9239each time Emacs becomes idle.
9240
9241If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9242idle for SECS seconds.
9243
9244*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9245all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9246programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9247instead.
9248
9249*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9250there is no answer within a certain time.
9251
9252 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9253
9254asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9255within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9256Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9257
9258** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9259arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9260meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9261arguments in between are ignored.
9262
9263This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9264the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9265
9266** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9267/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9268/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9269site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9270version.
9271
9272It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9273version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9274for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9275has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9276and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9277problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9278
9279** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9280.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9281systems with limited file name syntax.
9282
9283Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9284convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9285for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9286completions.el:
9287
9288(defvar save-completions-file-name
9289 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9290 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9291
9292This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9293depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9294convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9295Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9296MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9297
9298** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9299rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9300minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9301
9302** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9303marker from its buffer position.
9304
9305** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9306Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9307The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9308
9309** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9310that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9311condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9312of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9313matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9314regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9315
9316This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9317errors that happen often during editing.
9318
9319** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9320into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9321puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9322
9323** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9324now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9325
9326** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9327a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9328name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9329to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9330and not get-buffer-window.
9331
9332** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9333calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9334being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9335
9336If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9337buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9338property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9339non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9340are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9341property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9342over and over for the same text.
9343
9344** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9345
9346*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9347in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9348
9349;; @(#) HEADER: text
9350;; $HEADER: text $
9351
9352in addition to the normal
9353
9354;; HEADER: text
9355
9356*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9357checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9358lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9359
9360
a933dad1 9361\f
3787e12e 9362* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9363
9364----------------------------------------------------------------------
9365Copyright information:
9366
424d8b44 9367Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9368
9369 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9370 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9371 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9372 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9373
9374 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9375 of this document, or of portions of it,
9376 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9377 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9378\f
9379Local variables:
9380mode: outline
9381paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9382end: